2005 accord coupe online reference owner's...

2005 Accord Coupe Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For a printed owner's manual, click on authorized manuals or go to www.helminc.com. Contents

Introduction ......................................................................................................................................... i A Few Words About Safety ................................................................................................................. ii

Your Vehicle at a Glance .....................................................................................................................3Driver and Passenger Safety ..............................................................................................................5 Seat belts, SRS, and child protectionInstruments and Controls ................................................................................................................. 53Indicators, gauges, dashboard, and steering columnFeatures ............................................................................................................................................103Climate, audio, steering wheel, security, cruise control, and HomeLinkBefore Driving.................................................................................................................................. 159Fuel, vehicle break-in, and cargo loadingDriving .............................................................................................................................................. 173Engine and transmission operationMaintenance ..................................................................................................................................... 197Schedules, fluid checking, minor services, and vehicle storage

Taking Care of the Unexpected ...................................................................................................... 247Flat tire, dead battery, overheating, fusesTechnical Information..................................................................................................................... 271Vehicle specifications, tires, fuels, and emissions controlsWarranty and Customer Relations (U.S. and Canada) ................................................................ 285Warranty and contact informationAuthorized Manuals (U.S. only)...................................................................................................... 289How to orderIndex...................................................................................................................................................... I

Service Information Summary Fluid capacities and tire pressures

This Owner’s Manual should beconsidered a permanent part of thevehicle and should remain with thevehicle when it is sold.

This Owner’s Manual covers allmodels of the Accord Coupe. Youmay find descriptions of equipmentand features that are not on yourparticular model.

The information and specificationsincluded in this publication were ineffect at the time of approval forprinting. Honda Motor Co., Ltd.reserves the right, however, todiscontinue or change specificationsor design at any time without noticeand without incurring any obligationwhatsoever.

Owner’s Identif ication

OWNER

ADDRESS

V. I. N.

DELIVERY DATE

DEALER NAME DEALER NO.

ADDRESS

OWNER’S SIGNATURE

DEALER’S SIGNATURE

STREET

CITY STATE/PROVINCE ZIP CODE/POSTAL CODE

(Date sold to original retail purchaser)

STREET

CITY STATE/PROVINCE ZIP CODE/POSTAL CODE

０４／０８／０５　１０：３３：２３　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０００１　

Congratulations! Your selection of a 2005 Honda Accord was a wiseinvestment. It will give you years of driving pleasure.

As you read this manual, you willfind information that is preceded bya symbol. Thisinformation is intended to help youavoid damage to your vehicle, otherproperty, or the environment.

One of the best ways to enhance the enjoyment of your new vehicle is toread this manual. In it, you will learn how to operate its driving controls andconvenience items. Afterwards, keep this owner’s manual in your vehicle soyou can refer to it at any time.

Several warranties protect your new vehicle. Read the warranty bookletthoroughly so you understand the coverages and are aware of your rightsand responsibilities.

Maintaining your vehicle according to the schedules given in this manualhelps to keep your driving trouble-free while it preserves your investment.When your vehicle needs maintenance, keep in mind that your dealer’s staffis specially trained in servicing the many systems unique to your vehicle.Your dealer is dedicated to your satisfaction and will be pleased to answerany questions and concerns.

California Proposition 65 Warning

This product containsor emits chemicals known to theState of California to cause cancerand birth defects or otherreproductive harm.

Event Data Recorders

This vehicle is equipped with one ormore recording devices commonlyreferred to as event data recordersor sensing and diagnostic modules.

Introduction

WARNING:

i

０４／０８／０５　１０：３３：３１　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０００２　

－－

－

－－

－

Your safety, and the safety of others,is very important. And operating thisvehicle safely is an importantresponsibility.

To help you make informeddecisions about safety, we haveprovided operating procedures andother information on labels and inthis manual. This information alertsyou to potential hazards that couldhurt you or others.

Of course, it is not practical orpossible to warn you about all thehazards associated with operating ormaintaining your vehicle. You mustuse your own good judgement.

You will find this important safety information in a variety of forms,including:

on the vehicle.preceded by a safety alert symbol and one of

three signal words: , , or .

such as Important Safety Reminders or ImportantSafety Precautions.

such as Driver and Passenger Safety.how to use this vehicle correctly and safely.

This entire book is filled with important safety information please read itcarefully.

These signal words mean:

A Few Words About Safety

Safety LabelsSafety Messages

Safety Headings

Safety SectionInstructions

DANGER WARNING CAUTION

ii

You WILL be KILLED or SERIOUSLYHURT if you don’t follow instructions.

You CAN be KILLED or SERIOUSLYHURT if you don’t follow instructions.

You CAN be HURT if you don’t followinstructions.

０４／０８／０５　１０：３３：４４　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０００３　

Your Vehicle at a GlanceY

ourV

ehicleata

Glance

3

POWER WINDOWSWITCHES

MIRROR CONTROLS

AUDIO SYSTEM

POWER DOOR LOCKMASTER SWITCH

HOOD RELEASEHANDLE

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSIONMANUAL TRANSMISSION

HEATING/COOLINGCONTROLS

CLIMATE CONTROLSYSTEM

FUEL FILL DOOR/TRUNK RELEASE HANDLE

INSTRUMENT PANEL INDICATORSGAUGES

ACCESSORY POWER SOCKETS

FRONT PASSENGERAIRBAG

DRIVER’S FRONTAIRBAG

HAZARD WARNING BUTTON(P.55)(P.63)

(P.9, 22)

(P.93)

(P.76)

(P.89)

(P.161, 80) (P.162)(P.99)

(P.176)(P.179)

(P.111)

(P.104)

(P.9, 22)

(P.116)

(P.70)

CLOCK (P.150)

０４／０８／０５　１０：３４：２８　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０００６　

＊

＊

Only on vehicles equipped with Navigation System. Refer to the Navigation System Owner’s Manual.:

Your Vehicle at a Glance

4

HORN

HEADLIGHTS/TURN SIGNALS

TILT/TELESCOPICADJUSTMENT

EX-V6 model without Navigation System is shown.

REAR WINDOWDEFOGGER

INSTRUMENT PANEL BRIGHTNESS WINDSHIELD WIPERS/WASHERS

MOONROOF SWITCH

VOICE CONTROL SWITCHES

TRACTION CONTROLSYSTEM ON/OFFSWITCH

HAZARDWARNINGBUTTON

AUDIO SYSTEM

PASSENGERAIRBAG OFFINDICATOR

(P.70)

(P.68)

(P.148)

(P.92)

(P.67)

(P.28)

(P.70)

CRUISECONTROLBUTTONS(P.152)

(P.116)

(P.66)

(P.72)(P.188)

REMOTE AUDIOCONTROLS

(P.71)

０４／０８／０５　１０：３４：３６　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０００７　

－

This section gives you importantinformation about how to protectyourself and your passengers. Itshows you how to use seat belts. Itexplains how your airbags work. Andit tells you how to properly restraininfants and children in your vehicle.

.........Important Safety Precautions . 6.......Your Vehicle’s Safety Features . 7

.........Protecting Adults and Teens . 11.....1. Close and Lock the Doors . 11

...........2. Adjust the Front Seats . 11............3. Adjust the Seat-Backs . 12

...4. Adjust the Head Restraints . 135. Fasten and Position the

.............................Seat Belts . 146. Maintain a Proper Sitting

................................Position . 15.....Advice for Pregnant Women . 15

...Additional Safety Precautions . 16Additional Information About

.......................Your Seat Belts . 17..Seat Belt System Components . 17

......................Lap/Shoulder Belt . 17Automatic Seat Belt

...............................Tensioners . 18...............Seat Belt Maintenance . 18

Additional Information About...........................Your Airbags . 20

......Airbag System Components . 20......... 22

...How Your Side Airbags Work . 25How Your Side Curtain

..........................Airbags Work . 27..How the SRS Indicator Works . 27

How the Side Airbag Off......................Indicator Works . 28

How the Passenger Airbag...............Off Indicator Works . 28

.............................Airbag Service . 29...Additional Safety Precautions . 30

Protecting Children General................................Guidelines . 31

All Children Must Be...............................Restrained . 31

All Children Should Sit in a.................................Back Seat . 32

The Passenger’s Front Airbag.........Can Pose Serious Risks . 32

If You Must Drive with Several...................................Children . 34

If a Child Requires Close..................................Attention . 34

...Additional Safety Precautions . 35Protecting Infants and Small

...................................Children . 36.......................Protecting Infants . 36

.........Protecting Small Children . 37.....................Selecting a Child Seat . 38....................Installing a Child Seat . 39

...............................With LATCH . 40.........With a Lap/Shoulder Belt . 42

..............................With a Tether . 44...........Protecting Larger Children . 45

...............Checking Seat Belt Fit . 45..................Using a Booster Seat . 46

..When Can a Child Sit in Front . 47...Additional Safety Precautions . 48

.............Carbon Monoxide Hazard . 49...................................Safety Labels . 50

How Your Front Airbags Work

Driver and Passenger SafetyD

riverand

Passenger

Safety

5

０４／０８／０５　１０：３４：４１　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０００８　

－

You’ll find many safetyrecommendations throughout thissection, and throughout this manual.The recommendations on this pageare the ones we consider to be themost important.

A seat belt is your best protection inall types of collisions. Airbags aredesigned to supplement seat belts,not replace them. So even thoughyour vehicle is equipped with airbags,make sure you and your passengersalways wear your seat belts, andwear them properly (see page ).

Alcohol and driving don’t mix. Evenone drink can reduce your ability torespond to changing conditions, andyour reaction time gets worse with

every additional drink. So don’t drinkand drive, and don’t let your friendsdrink and drive, either.

While airbags can save lives, theycan cause serious or fatal injuries tooccupants who sit too close to them,or are not properly restrained.Infants, young children, and shortadults are at the greatest risk. Besure to follow all instructions andwarnings in this manual.

Children age 12 and under shouldride properly restrained in a backseat, not the front seat. Infants andsmall children should be restrainedin a child seat. Larger childrenshould use a booster seat and a lap/shoulder belt until they can use thebelt properly without a booster seat(see pages ).

Excessive speed is a major factor incrash injuries and deaths. Generally,the higher the speed, the greater therisk, but serious injuries can alsooccur at lower speeds. Never drivefaster than is safe for currentconditions, regardless of themaximum speed posted.

Having a tire blowout or amechanical failure can be extremelyhazardous. To reduce the possibilityof such problems, check your tirepressures and condition frequently,and perform all regularly scheduledmaintenance (see page ).

14

31 48

199

Important Safety Precautions

Always Wear Your Seat Belt

Control Your Speed

Don’t Drink and Drive

Be Aware of Airbag Hazards

Restrain All Children

Keep Your Vehicle in SafeCondition

6

０４／０８／０５　１０：３４：５３　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０００９　

Your vehicle is equipped with manyfeatures that work together toprotect you and your passengersduring a crash.

Some features do not require anyaction on your part. These include astrong steel framework that forms asafety cage around the passengercompartment; front and rear crushzones; a collapsible steering column;and tensioners that tighten the frontseat belts in a crash.

However, you and your passengerscan’t take full advantage of thesefeatures unless you remain sitting ina proper position and

. In fact, some safetyfeatures can contribute to injuries ifthey are not used properly.

The following pages explain how youcan take an active role in protectingyourself and your passengers.

Your Vehicle’s Safety Features

always wearyour seat belts

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

7

(1)

(2)

(2)

(3) (4)

(5)(7)

(8)

(7)

(10)

(11)

(9)

(6)

(9)(6)

(1) Safety Cage(2) Crush Zones(3) Seats and Seat-Backs(4) Head Restraints(5) Collapsible Steering Column(6) Seat Belts(7) Front Airbags(8) Side Airbags(9) Side Curtain Airbags(10) Door Locks(11) Front Seat Belt Tensioners

０４／０８／０５　１０：３５：０２　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　００１０　

Your vehicle is equipped with seatbelts in all seating positions.

Seat belts are the single mosteffective safety device for adults andlarger children. (Infants and smallerchildren must be properly restrainedin child seats.)

Not wearing a seat belt properlyincreases the chance of seriousinjury or death in a crash, eventhough your vehicle has airbags.

In addition, most states and allCanadian provinces require you towear seat belts.

When properly worn, seat belts:

Help protect you in almost everytype of crash, including frontal,side, and rear impacts androllovers.

Keep you connected to the vehicleso you can take advantage of thevehicle’s built-in safety features.

Help keep you from being thrownagainst the inside of the vehicleand against other occupants.

Keep you from being thrown outof the vehicle.

Your seat belt system also includesan indicator on the instrument panelto remind you and your passengersto fasten your seat belts. Help keep you in a good position

should the airbags ever deploy. Agood position reduces the risk ofinjury from an inflating airbag andallows you to get the bestadvantage from the airbag.

Of course, seat belts cannotcompletely protect you in everycrash. But in most cases, seat beltscan reduce your risk of seriousinjury.

Always wear your seat belt, andmake sure you wear it properly.


Seat Belts

Why Wear Seat Belts

What You Should Do:

8

Not wearing a seat belt properlyincreases the chance of seriousinjury or death in a crash, eventhough your vehicle has airbags.

Be sure you and yourpassengers always wear seatbelts and wear them properly.

０４／０８／０５　１０：３５：１６　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　００１１　

CONTINUED

Your vehicle has a SupplementalRestraint System (SRS) with frontairbags to help protect the heads andchests of the driver and a front seatpassenger during a moderate tosevere frontal collision (see page

for more information on howyour front airbags work).

Your vehicle also has side airbags tohelp protect the upper torso of thedriver or a front seat passengerduring a moderate to severe sideimpact (see page for moreinformation on how your side airbagswork).

Your vehicle also has side curtainairbags to help protect the heads ofthe driver, front passenger, andpassengers in the outer rear seatingpositions during a moderate tosevere side impact (see page formore information on how your sidecurtain airbags work).

22

2527


Airbags

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

9

０４／０８／０５　１０：３５：２７　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　００１２　

The most important things you needto know about your airbags are:

They are designed to supplementthe seat belts.

To dotheir job, airbags must inflate withtremendous force. So whileairbags help save lives, they cancause minor injuries or moreserious or even fatal injuries ifoccupants are not properlyrestrained or sitting properly.

Always wearyour seat belt properly, and situpright and as far back from thesteering wheel as possible whileallowing full control of the vehicle. Afront passenger should move theirseat as far back from the dashboardas possible.

The rest of this section gives moredetailed information about how youcan maximize your safety.

Remember, however, that no safetysystem can prevent all injuries ordeaths that can occur in a severecrash, even when seat belts areproperly worn and the airbags deploy.


Airbags do not replace seat belts.

Airbags offer no protection in rearimpacts, or minor frontal or sidecollisions.

Airbags can pose hazards.

What you should do:

10

０４／０８／０５　１０：３５：３５　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　００１３　

－

CONTINUED

Adjust the driver’s seat as far to therear as possible while allowing you tomaintain full control of the vehicle.Have a front passenger adjust theirseat as far to the rear as possible.

The following pages provideinstructions on how to properlyprotect the driver, adult passengers,and teenage children who are largeenough and mature enough to driveor ride in the front.

See pages for importantguidelines on how to properlyprotect infants, small children, andlarger children who ride in yourvehicle.

After everyone has entered thevehicle, be sure the doors are closedand locked.

Locking the doors reduces thechance of someone being thrown outof the vehicle during a crash, and ithelps prevent passengers fromaccidentally opening a door andfalling out.

Locking the doors also helps preventan outsider from unexpectedlyopening a door when you come to astop.

Your vehicle has a doormonitor indicator on theinstrument panel to indicate

when a specific door or the trunk isnot tightly closed.

See page for how to lock thedoors, and page for how the doormonitor indicator works.

59

31

76

38

Protecting Adults and Teens

Introduction Adjust the Front Seats

Close and Lock the Doors1.

2.

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

11

０４／０８／０５　１０：３５：４８　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　００１４　

If you sit too close to the steeringwheel or dashboard, you can beseriously injured by an inflating frontairbag, or by striking the steeringwheel or dashboard.

The National Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration and TransportCanada recommend that driversallow at least 10 inches (25 cm)between the center of the steeringwheel and the chest. In addition toadjusting the seat, you can adjust thesteering wheel in and out (see page

). Adjust the driver’s seat-back to acomfortable, upright position,leaving ample space between yourchest and the airbag cover in thecenter of the steering wheel.

Passengers with adjustable seat-backs should also adjust their seat-back to a comfortable, uprightposition.

If you cannot get far enough awayfrom the steering wheel and stillreach the controls, we recommendthat you investigate whether sometype of adaptive equipment may help.

Once your seat is adjusted correctly,rock it back and forth to make surethe seat is locked in position.

See page for how to adjust thefront seats.

7281


Adjust the Seat-Backs3.

12

Sitting too close to a frontairbag can result in seriousinjury or death if the frontairbags inflate.

Always sit as far back from thefront airbags as possible.

０４／０８／０５　１０：３６：００　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　００１５　

Adjust the driver’s head restraint sothe back of your head rests againstthe center of the restraint.

Have passengers with adjustablehead restraints adjust their restraintsproperly as well. Taller personsshould adjust their restraint as highas possible.

Properly adjusted head restraintswill help protect occupants fromwhiplash and other crash injuries.

See page for how to adjust thehead restraints.

See page for how to adjust theseat-backs.

Reclining a seat-back so that theshoulder part of the belt no longerrests against the occupant’s chestreduces the protective capability ofthe belt. It also increases the chanceof sliding under the belt in a crashand being seriously injured. Thefarther a seat-back is reclined, thegreater the risk of injury.

81

86


Adjust the Head Restraints4.

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

13

Improperly positioning headrestraints reduces theireffectiveness and you can beseriously injured in a crash.

Make sure head restraints arein place and positioned properlybefore driving.

Reclining the seat-back too farcan result in serious injury ordeath in a crash.

Adjust the seat-back to anupright position, and sit wellback in the seat.

０４／０８／０５　１０：３６：１１　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　００１６　

This could causevery serious injuries in a crash.

Position the lap part of the belt aslow as possible across your hips,then pull up on the shoulder part ofthe belt so the lap part fits snugly.This lets your strong pelvic bones

take the force of a crash and reducesthe chance of internal injuries.

See page for additionalinformation about your seat beltsand how to take care of them.

Insert the latch plate into the buckle,then tug on the belt to make sure thebelt is securely latched. Check thatthe belt is not twisted, because atwisted belt can cause seriousinjuries in a crash.

If necessary, pull up on the belt againto remove any slack, then check thatthe belt rests across the center ofyour chest and over your shoulder.

If a seat belt does not seem to workproperly, it may not protect theoccupant in a crash.

Using a seatbelt that is not working properly canresult in serious injury or death.Have your dealer check the belt assoon as possible.

This spreads the force of a crashover the strongest bones in yourupper body.

17

Never place the shoulder portion of alap/shoulder belt under your arm orbehind your back.

No one should sit in a seat with aninoperative seat belt.


Fasten and Position the SeatBelts

5.

14

Improperly positioning the seatbelts can cause serious injuryor death in a crash.

Make sure all seat belts areproperly positioned beforedriving.

０４／０８／０５　１０：３６：２２　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　００１７　

After all occupants have adjustedtheir seats and put on seat belts, it isvery important that they continue tosit upright, well back in their seats,with their feet on the floor, until thevehicle is parked and the engine isoff.

Sitting improperly can increase thechance of injury during a crash. Forexample, if an occupant slouches,lies down, turns sideways, sitsforward, leans forward or sideways,or puts one or both feet up, thechance of injury during a crash isgreatly increased.

In addition, an occupant who is out ofposition in the front seat can beseriously or fatally injured in a crashby striking interior parts of thevehicle or being struck by aninflating front airbag.

If you are pregnant, the best way toprotect yourself and your unbornchild when driving or riding in avehicle is to always wear a seat belt,and keep the lap part of the belt aslow as possible across the hips.

CONTINUED


Maintain a Proper SittingPosition

Advice for Pregnant Women6.

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

15

Sitting improperly or out ofposition can result in seriousinjury or death in a crash.

Always sit upright, well back inthe seat, with your feet on thefloor.

０４／０８／０５　１０：３６：３１　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　００１８　

When driving, remember to situpright and adjust the seat as farback as possible while allowing fullcontrol of the vehicle. When ridingas a front passenger, adjust the seatas far back as possible.

This will reduce the risk of injuriesto both you and your unborn childthat can be caused by a crash or aninflating front airbag.

Each time you have a checkup, askyour doctor if it’s okay for you todrive.

If they do, theycould be very seriously injured in acrash.

Carrying hard or sharpobjects on your lap, or driving witha pipe or other sharp object inyour mouth, can result in injuriesif your front airbag inflates.

Devices intended to improveoccupant comfort or reposition theshoulder part of a seat belt canreduce the protective capability ofthe belt and increase the chance ofserious injury in a crash.

If yourhands or arms are close to anairbag cover, they could be injuredif the airbag inflates.

Objects onthe covers marked ‘‘SRS AIRBAG’’could interfere with the properoperation of the airbags or bepropelled inside the vehicle andhurt someone if the airbags inflate.

If a side airbag or aside curtain airbag inflates, a cupholder or other hard objectattached on or near the door couldbe propelled inside the vehicle andhurt someone.


Two people should never use thesame seat belt.

Do not place hard or sharp objectsbetween yourself and a frontairbag.

Do not put any accessories on seatbelts.

Keep your hands and arms awayfrom the airbag covers.

Do not attach or place objects onthe front airbag covers.

Do not attach hard objects on ornear a door.

Additional Safety Precautions

16

０４／０８／０５　１０：３６：４１　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　００１９　

Your seat belt system includes lap/shoulder belts in all five seatingpositions. The front seat belts arealso equipped with automatic seatbelt tensioners.

The seat belt systemincludes an indicator on the

instrument panel and a beeper toremind you to fasten your seat belt.

If you turn the ignition to ON (II)before fastening your seat belt, thebeeper will sound and the indicatorwill flash. If you do not fasten yourseat belt before the beeper stops, theindicator will stop flashing butremain on.

If you continue driving withoutfastening your seat belt, the beeperwill sound and the indicator will flashagain at regular intervals.

The lap and shoulder belt goes overyour shoulder, across your chest,and across your hips.

To fasten the belt, insert the latchplate into the buckle, then tug on thebelt to make sure the buckle islatched (see page for how toproperly position the belt).

To unlock the belt, push the redPRESS button on the buckle. Guidethe belt across your body so that itretracts completely. After exiting thevehicle, be sure the belt is out of theway and will not get closed in thedoor.

All seat belts have an emergencylocking retractor. In normal driving,the retractor lets you move freely inyour seat while it keeps sometension on the belt. During a collisionor sudden stop, the retractorautomatically locks the belt to help

restrain your body.

The seat belts in all positions exceptthe driver’s have an additionallocking mechanism that must beactivated to secure a child seat (seepage ).

If the shoulder part of the belt ispulled all the way out, the lockingmechanism will activate. The beltwill retract, but it will not allow thepassenger to move freely.

To deactivate the lockingmechanism, unlatch the buckle andlet the seat belt fully retract. Torefasten the seat belt, pull it out onlyas far as needed.

42

14

Seat Belt System Components Lap/Shoulder Belt

Additional Information About Your Seat BeltsD

riverand

Passenger

Safety

17

０４／０８／０５　１０：３６：５３　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　００２０　

For added protection, the front seatbelts are equipped with automaticseat belt tensioners. When activated,the tensioners immediately tightenthe belts to help hold the driver anda front passenger in place.

When the tensioners are activated,the seat belts will remain tight untilthey are unbuckled in the normalmanner.

For safety, you should check thecondition of your seat belts regularly.

Honda provides a lifetime warrantyon seat belts for U.S. models. Seeyourbooklet for details.

The tensioners are designed toactivate primarily in frontal collisions,and they should activate in anycollision severe enough to causefront airbag inflation.

The tensioners can also be activatedduring a collision in which the frontairbags do not deploy. In this case,the airbags would not be needed, butthe additional restraint could behelpful.

Pull each belt out fully and look forfrays, cuts, burns, and wear. Checkthat the latches work smoothly andthe belts retract easily. Any belt thatis not in good condition or workingproperly may not provide adequateprotection and should be replaced assoon as possible.

Honda Warranty Information

Seat Belt MaintenanceAutomatic Seat Belt Tensioners

Additional Information About Your Seat Belts

18

０４／０８／０５　１０：３７：０３　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　００２１　

If a seat belt is worn during a crash,it must be replaced by the dealer. Abelt that has been worn during acrash may not provide the same levelof protection in a subsequent crash.

The dealer should also inspect theanchors for damage and replacethem if needed. If the automatic seatbelt tensioners activate during acrash, they must be replaced.

For information on how to clean yourseat belts, see page .234

Additional Information About Your Seat BeltsD

riverand

Passenger

Safety

19

Not checking or maintainingseat belts can result in seriousinjury or death if the seat beltsdo not work properly whenneeded.

Check your seat belts regularlyand have any problemcorrected as soon as possible.

０４／０８／０５　１０：３７：０８　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　００２２　

Your airbag system includes:

Two SRS (Supplemental RestraintSystem) front airbags. The driver’sairbag is stored in the center ofthe steering wheel; the frontpassengers’ airbag is stored in thedashboard. Both are marked ‘‘SRSAIRBAG’’ (see page ).

Two side airbags, one for thedriver and one for a frontpassenger. The airbags are storedin the outer edges of the seat-backs. Both are marked ‘‘SIDEAIRBAG’’ (see page ).

Two side curtain airbags, one foreach side of the vehicle. Theairbags are stored in the ceilingabove the side windows. The frontand rear pillars are marked ‘‘SIDECURTAIN AIRBAG’’ (see page

).

22

27

25

Airbag System Components

Additional Information About Your Airbags

20

(1) (2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(8)

(7)

(10)

(11)(9)

(6)

(4)

(7)

(8)

(10)

(5)

(12)

(6) Driver’s Seat Position Sensor(7) Front Passenger’s Weight Sensors(8) Front Impact Sensors(9) Passenger Airbag Off Indicator(10) Side Impact Sensors

(1) Driver’s Airbag(2) Front Passenger’s Airbag(3) Control Unit(4) Front Seat Belt Tensioners(5) Side Airbags

(11) Occupant Position Detection System (OPDS) Sensors(12) SRS Indicator

０４／０８／０５　１０：３７：１８　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　００２３　

An indicator on the dashboard thatalerts you that the passenger’sfront airbag has been turned off(see page ).

Emergency backup power in caseyour vehicle’s electrical system isdisconnected in a crash.

Automatic front seat belttensioners (see page ).

Sensors that can detect amoderate to severe front impact orside impact.

A sophisticated electronic systemthat continually monitors andrecords information about thesensors, the control unit, theairbag activators, the seat belttensioners, and driver and frontpassenger seat belt use when theignition is in the ON (II) position.

Sensors that can detect whether achild is in the passenger’s sideairbag path and automatically turnthe airbag off (see page ).

A driver’s seat position sensor thatmonitors the distance of the seatfrom the front airbag. If the seat istoo far forward, the airbag willinflate with less force (see page

).An indicator on the instrumentpanel that alerts you to a possibleproblem with your airbags,sensors, or seat belt tensioners(see page ).

Weight sensors that monitor theweight on the front passenger’sseat. These automatically turn offthe passenger’s front airbag ifthey detect an infant or small childmay be in the seat (see page ).

An indicator on the instrumentpanel that alerts you that thepassenger’s side airbag has beenturned off (see page ).

18

28

24

27

28

28

24

Additional Information About Your AirbagsD

riverand

Passenger

Safety

21

０４／０８／０５　１０：３７：２８　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　００２４　

After inflating, the front airbags willimmediately deflate, so they won’tinterfere with the driver’s visibility,or the ability to steer or operateother controls.

The total time for inflation anddeflation is one-tenth of a second, sofast that most occupants are notaware that the airbags deployed untilthey see them lying in their laps.

During a frontal crash, your seat beltrestrains your lower body and torso,and the front airbag helps protectyour head and chest.

Although both airbags normallyinflate within a split second of eachother, it is possible for only oneairbag to deploy.

This can happen if the severity of acollision is at the margin, orthreshold, that determines whetheror not the airbags will deploy. Insuch cases, the seat belt will providesufficient protection, and thesupplemental protection offered bythe airbag would be minimal.

Only the driver’s airbag can deploy ifthere is no passenger in the frontseat, or if the advanced airbagsystem has turned the passenger’sairbag off (see page ).

If you ever have a moderate tosevere frontal collision, sensors willdetect the vehicle’s rapiddeceleration.

If the rate of deceleration is highenough, the control unit will instantlyinflate the driver’s and frontpassenger’s airbags, at the time andwith the force needed. 24

How Your Front Airbags Work


22

０４／０８／０５　１０：３７：３９　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　００２５　

Your front airbags are also dual-threshold airbags. Airbags with thisfeature have two deploymentthresholds that depend on whetheror not the occupant is wearing a seatbelt.

If the occupant’s belt is ,the airbag will deploy at a slightlylower threshold, because theoccupant would need extraprotection.

It the occupant’s belt is , theairbag will inflate at a slightly higherthreshold, when the airbag would beneeded to supplement the protectionprovided by the seat belt.

Your front airbags are dual-stageairbags. This means they have twoinflation stages that can be ignitedsequentially or simultaneously,depending on crash severity.

In a crash, both stageswill ignite simultaneously to providethe quickest and greatest protection.

In a crash, one stage willignite first, then the second stagewill ignite a split second later. Thisprovides longer airbag inflation timewith a little less force.

After a crash, you may see whatlooks like smoke. This is actuallypowder from the airbag’s surface.Although the powder is not harmful,people with respiratory problemsmay experience some temporarydiscomfort. If this occurs, get out ofthe vehicle as soon as it is safe to doso.


Dual-Threshold Airbags

not latched

latched

Dual-Stage Airbags

more severe

less severe

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

23

０４／０８／０５　１０：３７：４９　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　００２６　

The driver’s advanced front airbagsystem includes a seat positionsensor under the seat. If the seat istoo far forward, the airbag willinflate with less force, regardless ofthe severity of the impact.

The passenger’s advanced frontairbag system has weight sensorsunder the seat. If the sensors detectan infant or small child may be in theseat, the system will automaticallyturn the passenger’s front airbag off.

If there is a problem with the sensor,the SRS Indicator will come on, andthe airbag will inflate in the normalmanner regardless of the driver’sseating position.

Your front airbags are also advancedairbags. The main purpose of thisfeature is to help prevent airbag-caused injuries to short drivers andchildren who ride in front.

For both advanced airbags to workproperly:

Occupants must sit upright andwear their seat belts properly.

Do not spill any liquids on orunder the seats, cover the sensors,or put any cargo or metal objectsunder the front seats.

Back-seat passengers should notput their feet under the front seats.

Failure to follow these instructionscould damage the sensors or preventthem from working properly.


Advanced Airbags

24

DRIVER’SSEATPOSITIONSENSOR

PASSENGER’SSEAT WEIGHTSENSOR

０４／０８／０５　１０：３７：５９　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　００２７　

Moving the front seat forciblyback against cargo on the seat orfloor behind it.

Hanging heavy items on the frontpassenger seat, or placing heavyitems in the seat-back pocket.

When the airbag is turned off, anindicator in the center of thedashboard will come on indicatingpassenger airbag ‘‘OFF’’ (see page

).

If there is no passenger in the frontseat, the airbag will be off. However,the Passenger Airbag Off indicatorwill not come on.

To ensure that the passenger’sadvanced front airbag system willwork properly,

This includes:

A rear passenger pushing orpulling on the back of thepassenger’s seat.

If you ever have a moderate tosevere side impact, sensors willdetect rapid deceleration and signalthe control unit to instantly inflateeither the driver’s or the passenger’sside airbag.

Also, make sure the floor matbehind the front passenger’s seatis hooked to the floor mat anchor(see page ). If it is not, the matmay interfere with the properoperation of the sensors andoperation of the seat.

234

28

CONTINUED


How Your Side Airbags Work

do not do anythingthat would increase or decrease theweight on the front passenger’s seat.

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

25

０４／０８／０５　１０：３８：１１　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　００２８　

There will be some delay betweenthe moment the passenger movesinto or out of the airbag deploymentpath and when the indicator comeson or goes off.

A front seat passenger should notuse a cushion or other object as abackrest. It may prevent the cutoffsystem from working properly.

Only one airbag will deploy during aside impact. If the impact is on thepassenger’s side, the passenger’sside airbag will deploy even if thereis no passenger.

To get the best protection from theside airbags, front seat occupantsshould wear their seat belts and situpright and well back in their seats.

To reduce the risk of injury from aninflating side airbag, your vehicle hasan automatic cutoff system for thepassenger’s side airbag.

Although Honda does not encouragechildren to ride in front, this systemis designed to shut off the sideairbag if a child leans into the sideairbag’s path.

The side airbag may also shut off if ashort adult leans sideways, or alarger adult slouches and leanssideways into the airbag’sdeployment path.

Objects placed on the frontpassenger seat can also cause theside airbag to be shut off.

If the Side Airbag Off Indicatorcomes on (see page ), have thepassenger sit upright. Once thepassenger is out of the airbag’sdeployment path, the system willturn the airbag back on, and theindicator will go out.

28Side Airbag Cutoff System


26

０４／０８／０５　１０：３８：２０　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　００２９　

CONTINUED

In a moderate to severe side impact,sensors will detect rapid decelerationand signal the control unit toinstantly inflate the side curtainairbag on the driver’s or thepassenger’s side of the vehicle.

If the impact is on the passenger’sside, the passenger’s side curtainairbag will inflate even if there are nooccupants on that side of the vehicle.

To get the best protection from theside curtain airbags, occupantsshould wear their seat belts and situpright and well back in their seats.

The SRS indicator alertsyou to a potential problem

with your airbags or seat belttensioners.

When you turn the ignition switch toON (II), this indicator will come onbriefly then go out. This tells you thesystem is working properly.

If the indicator comes on at anyother time, or does not come on at all,you should have the system checkedby your dealer. For example:

If the SRS indicator does not comeon after you turn the ignitionswitch to ON (II).

If the indicator stays on after theengine starts.

If the indicator comes on orflashes on and off while you drive.


How Your Side Curtain AirbagsWork

How the SRS Indicator Works

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

27

SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG

０４／０８／０５　１０：３８：３５　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　００３０　

This indicator alerts you that thepassenger’s front airbag has beenshut off because weight sensorsdetect an infant or small child maybe in the front passenger’s seat. Itdoes there is a problemwith the airbag.

If you see any of these indications,the airbags and seat belt tensionersmay not work when you need them.

This indicator alerts you that thepassenger’s side airbag has beenautomatically shut off. It doesmean there is a problem with yourside airbags.

When you turn the ignition switch toON (II), the indicator should lightbriefly and go off (see page ). If itdoesn’t light, it stays on, or comes onwhile driving without a passenger inthe front seat, have the systemchecked.

57


How the Side Airbag OffIndicator Works

How the Passenger Airbag OffIndicator Works

not mean

not

28

U.S. CanadaPASSENGER AIRBAG OFF INDICATOR

CanadaU.S.

Ignoring the SRS indicator canresult in serious injury or deathif the airbag systems ortensioners do not work properly.

Have your vehicle checked by adealer as soon as possible ifthe SRS indicator alerts you toa possible problem.

０４／０８／０５　１０：３８：４５　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　００３１　

Your airbag systems are virtuallymaintenance free, and there are noparts you can safely service.However, you must have yourvehicle serviced if:

If no one is riding in the front seat,the airbag will be automatically shutoff. However, the indicator will notcome on.

However, if the indicator comes onwith no passenger in the front, orwith an adult in the seat, there maybe a problem with the advancedairbag system. Have the vehiclechecked by the dealer as soon aspossible.

The Passenger Airbag Off indicatormay also come on and off repeatedlyif total weight on the seat is near theairbag cutoff threshold.

If this happens, have the passengerride properly restrained in a backseat. If the passenger must ride infront, move the seat as far to therear as possible, have the passengersit upright and wear the seat beltproperly.

Any airbagthat has deployed must bereplaced along with the controlunit and other related parts. If afront airbag inflates, the seat belttensioners must also be replaced.

Do not try to remove or replaceany airbag by yourself. This mustbe done by your dealer or aknowledgeable body shop.

Take your vehicle to anauthorized dealer as soon aspossible. If you ignore thisindication, your airbags may notoperate properly.

Even if yourairbags do not inflate, your dealershould inspect the driver’s seatposition sensor, the frontpassenger’s weight sensors, thefront seat belt tensioners, and allthe seat belts worn during thecrash, to make sure they areoperating properly.

Airbag Service


An airbag ever inflates.

The SRS indicator alerts you to aproblem.

If your vehicle has a moderate tosevere impact.

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

29

０４／０８／０５　１０：３８：５５　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　００３２　

Together, airbags andseat belts provide the bestprotection.

Tampering could causethe airbags to deploy, possiblycausing very serious injury.

This could make thedriver’s seat position sensor or thefront passenger’s weight sensorsineffective. If it is necessary toremove or modify a front seat toaccommodate a person withdisabilities, first contact HondaAutomobile Customer Service at(800) 999-1009.

Improperly replacingor covering front seat-back coverscan prevent your side airbags frominflating during a side impact.

Additional Safety PrecautionsDo not attempt to deactivate yourairbags.

Do not tamper with airbagcomponents or wiring for anyreason.

Do not remove or modify a frontseat without consulting yourdealer.

Do not cover or replace front seat-back covers without consultingyour dealer.


30

０４／０８／０５　１０：３９：０２　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　００３３　

－

－－

Children depend on adults to protectthem. However, despite their bestintentions, many adults do not knowhow to protect childpassengers.

If you have children, or ever need todrive with a child in your vehicle, besure to read this section. It beginswith important general guidelines,then presents special information forinfants, small children, and largerchildren.

Each year, many children are injuredor killed in vehicle crashes becausethey are either unrestrained or notproperly restrained. In fact, vehicleaccidents are the number one causeof the death of children ages 12 andunder.

To reduce the number of childdeaths and injuries, every state andCanadian province requires thatinfants and children be properlyrestrained when they ride in avehicle.

(see pages ).(see pages ).

36 444845

properly

Protecting Children General Guidelines

All Children Must Be Restrained

Infants and small children must berestrained in an approved child seatthat is properly secured to thevehicle

Larger children must be restrainedwith a lap/shoulder belt and ride ona booster seat until the seat belt f itsthem properly

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

31

Children who are unrestrainedor improperly restrained can beseriously injured or killed in acrash.

Any child too small for a seatbelt should be properlyrestrained in a child seat. Alarger child should be properlyrestrained with a seat belt anduse a booster seat if necessary.

０４／０８／０５　１０：３９：１１　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　００３４　

－

According to accident statistics,children of all ages and sizes aresafer when they are restrained in aback seat. The National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration andTransport Canada recommend thatall children age 12 and under beproperly restrained in a back seat.

Front airbags have been designed tohelp protect adults in a moderate tosevere frontal collision. To do this,the passenger’s front airbag is quitelarge, and it can inflate with enoughforce to cause very serious injuries.

Even though your vehicle has anadvanced front airbag system, whichcan automatically turn thepassenger’s front airbag off (seepage ), please follow theguidelines below.

Ifthe airbag inflates, it can hit the backof the child seat with enough forceto kill or very seriously injure aninfant.

If the vehicle seat istoo far forward, or the child’s head isthrown forward during a collision, aninflating front airbag can strike thechild with enough force to kill orvery seriously injure a small child.

Whenever possible,larger children should sit in the backseat, on a booster seat if needed, andbe properly restrained with a seatbelt (see page for importantinformation about protecting largerchildren).

Children who ride in back are lesslikely to be injured by strikinginterior vehicle parts during acollision or hard braking. Also,children cannot be injured by aninflating front airbag when they ridein the back.

Some states have laws restrictingwhere children may ride.

45

28

The Passenger’s Front AirbagCan Pose Serious Risks

All Children Should Sit in a BackSeat


InfantsNever put a rear-facing child seat inthe front seat of a vehicle equippedwith a passenger’s front airbag.

Small ChildrenPlacing a forward-facing child seat inthe front seat of a vehicle equippedwith a passenger’s front airbag canbe hazardous.

Larger ChildrenChildren who have outgrown childseats are also at risk of being injuredor killed by an inflating passenger’sfront airbag.

32

０４／０８／０５　１０：３９：２４　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　００３５　

－

To remind you of the passenger’sfront airbag hazards, and thatchildren must be properly restrainedin a back seat, your vehicle haswarning labels on the dashboard(U.S. models) and on the front visors.Please read and follow theinstructions on these labels.


Canadian Models

U.S. Models

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

33

SUN VISOR

SUN VISOR

DASHBOARD

０４／０８／０５　１０：３９：４０　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　００３６　

－

Many parents say they prefer to putan infant or small child in the frontpassenger seat so they can watch thechild, or because the child requiresattention.

Placing a child in the front seatexposes the child to hazards in afrontal collision, and paying closeattention to a child distracts thedriver from the important tasks ofdriving, placing both of you at risk.

Your vehicle has a back seat wherechildren can be properly restrained.If you ever have to carry a group ofchildren, and a child must ride infront:

If a child requires close physicalattention or frequent visualcontact, we strongly recommendthat another adult ride with thechild in a back seat. The back seatis far safer for a child than thefront.

Place the largest child in the frontseat, provided the child is largeenough to wear the lap/shoulderbelt properly (see page ).

Move the vehicle seat as far to therear as possible (see page ).

Have the child sit upright and wellback in the seat (see page ).

Make sure the seat belt is properlypositioned and secured (see page

).

15

14

45

81

If a Child Requires CloseAttention

If You Must Drive with SeveralChildren


34

０４／０８／０５　１０：３９：５１　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　００３７　

－


Even very youngchildren learn how to unlockvehicle doors, turn on the ignitionswitch, and open the trunk, whichcan lead to accidental injury ordeath.

If you are not wearing aseat belt in a crash, you could bethrown forward and crush thechild against the dashboard or aseat-back. If you are wearing aseat belt, the child can be tornfrom your arms and be seriouslyhurt or killed.

Leaving children withoutadult supervision is illegal in moststates and Canadian provinces,and can be very hazardous.

For example, infants and smallchildren left in a vehicle on a hotday can die from heatstroke. Achild left alone with the key in theignition switch can accidentally setthe vehicle in motion, possiblyinjuring themselves or others.

Children who play in vehicles canaccidentally get trapped inside.Teach your children not to play inor around vehicles. Know how tooperate the emergency trunkopener and decide if your childrenshould be shown how to use thisfeature (see page ).

During a crash, thebelt could press deep into the childand cause serious or fatal injuries.

80


Never let two children use thesame seat belt.

Keep vehicle keys/remotetransmitters out of the reach ofchildren.

Never hold an infant or child onyour lap.

Do not leave children alone in avehicle.

Lock both doors and the trunkwhen your vehicle is not in use.

Never put a seat belt over yourselfand a child.

Protecting Children General GuidelinesD

riverand

Passenger

Safety

35

０４／０８／０５　１０：４０：００　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　００３８　

An infant must be properlyrestrained in a rear-facing, recliningchild seat until the child reaches theseat maker’s weight or height limitfor the seat and the child is at leastone year old.

Only a rear-facing child seat providesproper support for a baby’s head,neck, and back.

Two types of seats may be used: aseat designed exclusively for infants,or a convertible seat used in the rear-facing, reclining mode.

If placedfacing forward, an infant could bevery seriously injured during afrontal collision.

A rear-facing child seat can be placedin any seating position in the backseat, but not in the front.

If the passenger’s front airbaginflates, it can hit the back of thechild seat with enough force to kill orseriously injure an infant.

When properly installed, a rear-facing child seat may prevent thedriver or a front passenger frommoving the seat as far back asrecommended, or from locking theseat-back in the desired position.

Or, it can interfere with properoperation of the passenger’sadvanced front airbag system.

Protecting Infants

Child Seat Type

Do not put a rear-facing child seat ina forward-facing position.

Rear-facing Child Seat Placement

Never put arear-facing child seat in the frontseat.

Protecting Infants and Small Children

36

０４／０８／０５　１０：４０：１１　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　００３９　

A child who is at least one year old,and who fits within the child seatmaker’s weight and height limits,should be restrained in a forward-facing, upright child seat.

Of the different seats available, werecommend those that have a five-point harness system as shown.

In any situation, we stronglyrecommend that you install the childseat directly behind the frontpassenger’s seat, move the seat asfar forward as needed, and leave itunoccupied. Or, you may wish to geta smaller rear-facing child seat.

We strongly recommend placing aforward-facing child seat in a backseat, not the front.

Even with advanced front airbags,which can automatically turn thepassenger’s front airbag off (seepage ), a back seat is the safestplace for a small child.

24

CONTINUED

Protecting Small Children

Child Seat Type

Child Seat Placement

Protecting Infants and Small ChildrenD

riverand

Passenger

Safety

37

Placing a rear-facing child seatin the front seat can result inserious injury or death during acollision.

Always place a rear-facing childseat in the back seat, not thefront.

０４／０８／０５　１０：４０：２２　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　００４０　

Conventional child seats must besecured to a vehicle with a seat belt,whereas LATCH-compatible seatsare secured by attaching the seat tohardware built into the two outerseating positions in the back seat.

Since LATCH-compatible child seatsare easier to install and reduce thepossibility of improper installation,we recommend selecting this style.

We also recommend selecting aLATCH-compatible seat with a rigid,rather than a flexible, anchor (seepage ).

If it is necessary to put a forward-facing child seat in the front, movethe vehicle seat as far to the rear aspossible, be sure the child seat isfirmly secured to the vehicle, and thechild is properly strapped in the seat.

When buying a child seat, you needto choose either a conventional childseat, or one designed for use withthe Lower Anchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH) system.

In seating positions and vehicles notequipped with LATCH, a LATCH-compatible child seat can be installedusing a seat belt.

Whatever type of seat you choose, toprovide proper protection, a childseat should meet threerequirements:

Look for FMVSS213 or CMVSS 213 on the box.

Rear-facing for infants, forward-facing for small children.

1.

2.

40

Selecting a Child Seat

Protecting Infants and Small Children, Selecting a Child Seat

The child seat should meet U.S. orCanadian Motor Vehicle SafetyStandard 213.

The child seat should be of theproper type and size to fit the child.

38

Placing a forward-facing childseat in the front seat can resultin serious injury or death if thefront airbag inflates.

If you must place a forward-facing child seat in front, movethe vehicle seat as far back aspossible, and properly restrainthe child.

０４／０８／０５　１０：４０：３４　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　００４１　

After selecting a proper child seat,and a good place to install the seat,there are three main steps ininstalling the seat:

All child seats must besecured to the vehicle with the lappart of a lap/shoulder belt or withthe LATCH (Lower Anchors andTethers for Children) system. Achild whose seat is not properlysecured to the vehicle can beendangered in a crash.

After installing a childseat, push and pull the seatforward and from side to side toverify that it is secure.

A child seat secured with a seat beltshould be installed as firmly aspossible. However, it does not needto be ‘‘rock solid.’’ Some side-to-side

movement can be expected andshould not reduce the child seat’seffectiveness.

If the child seat is not secure, tryinstalling it in a different seatingposition, or use a different style ofchild seat that can be firmly secured.

Before purchasing a conventionalchild seat, or using a previouslypurchased one, we recommend thatyou test the seat in the specificvehicle seating position, or positions,where the seat will be used.

Make sure the child is properlystrapped in the child seataccording to the child seat maker’sinstructions. A child who is notproperly secured in a child seatcan be seriously injured in a crash.

The following pages provideguidelines on how to properly installa child seat. A forward-facing childseat is used in all examples, but theinstructions are the same for rear-facing child seats.

3.

1.

2.

3.

Installing a Child Seat

Properly secure the child seat tothe vehicle.

Make sure the child seat is firmlysecured.

The child seat should fit thevehicle seating position (orpositions) where it will be used.

Secure the child in the child seat.

Selecting a Child Seat, Installing a Child SeatD

riverand

Passenger

Safety

39

０４／０８／０５　１０：４０：４４　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　００４２　

Place the child seat on the vehicleseat, then attach the seat to thelower anchors according to thechild seat maker’s instructions.

To install a LATCH-compatible childseat:

Make sure there are no objectsnear the anchors that couldprevent a secure connectionbetween the child seat and theanchors.Your vehicle is equipped with

LATCH (Lower Anchors andTethers for Children) at the outerrear seats.

The lower anchors are locatedbetween the seat-back and seatbottom, and are to be used only witha child seat designed for use withLATCH.

The location of each lower anchor isindicated by a small button above theanchor point.

Move the seat belt buckle ortongue away from the loweranchors.

Some LATCH-compatible seatshave a rigid-type connector asshown above.

1.

2.

3.

Installing a Child Seat withLATCH


40

Rigid typeLOWER ANCHORS

BUTTON

０４／０８／０５　１０：４０：５４　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　００４３　

Lift the head restraint (see page), then route the tether strap

through the legs of the headrestraint, over the seat-back,making sure the strap is nottwisted.

Other LATCH-compatible seatshave a flexible-type connector asshown above.

Whatever type you have, followthe child seat maker’s instructionsfor adjusting or tightening the fit.

Attach the tether strap hook to thetether anchor, then tighten thestrap as instructed by the childseat maker.

Push and pull the child seatforward and from side to side toverify that it is secure.

4.

5.

6.

7.

86

Installing a Child SeatD

riverand

Passenger

Safety

41

Flexible type

TETHER STRAP HOOK

ANCHOR

０４／０８／０５　１０：４１：０３　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　００４４　

When not using the LATCH system,all child seats must be secured to thevehicle with the lap part of a lap/shoulder belt.

With the child seat in the desiredseating position, route the beltthrough the child seat accordingto the seat maker’s instructions,then insert the latch plate into thebuckle.

To activate the lockable retractor,slowly pull the shoulder part of thebelt all the way out until it stops,then let the belt feed back into theretractor.

After the belt has retracted, tug onit. If the belt is locked, you will notbe able to pull it out. If you can pullthe belt out, it is not locked, andyou will need to repeat these steps.

In addition, the lap/shoulder belts inall seating positions except thedriver’s have a locking mechanismthat must be activated to secure achild seat.

1. 2.

3.

Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Belt


42

０４／０８／０５　１０：４１：１２　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　００４５　

To deactivate the lockingmechanism and remove a child seat,unlatch the buckle, unroute the seatbelt, and let the belt fully retract.

Push and pull the child seatforward and from side to side toverify that it is secure enough tostay upright during normal drivingmaneuvers. If the child seat is notsecure, unlatch the belt, allow it toretract fully, then repeat thesesteps.

After confirming that the belt islocked, grab the shoulder part ofthe belt near the buckle, and pullup to remove any slack from thelap part of the belt. Remember, ifthe lap part of the belt is not tight,the child seat will not be secure.

To remove slack, it may help toput weight on the child seat, orpush on the back of the seat whilepulling up on the belt.

5.4.

Installing a Child SeatD

riverand

Passenger

Safety

43

０４／０８／０５　１０：４１：２１　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　００４６　

A child seat with a tether can beinstalled in any seating position inthe back seat, using the anchoragepoints shown above.

Since a tether can provide additionalsecurity to the lap/shoulder beltinstallation, we recommend using atether whenever one is required oravailable.

After properly securing the childseat (see page ), lift the headrestraint, then route the tetherstrap over the seat-back andthrough the head restraint legs.

Tighten the strap according to theseat maker’s instructions.

After properly securing the childseat (see page ), route thetether strap over the seat-back.

Follow steps 2 and 3 from theprevious column.Lift the cover, then attach the

tether strap hook to the anchor,making sure the strap is nottwisted.

1.

2.

3.

1.

2.

42

42

Installing a Child Seat with aTether


Using the Center AnchorUsing an Outer Anchor

44

COVER

TETHER ANCHORAGE POINTS

ANCHOR

TETHERSTRAPHOOK

TETHER STRAP HOOK

ANCHOR

０４／０８／０５　１０：４１：３２　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　００４７　

When a child reaches therecommended weight or height limitfor a forward-facing child seat, thechild should sit in a back seat on abooster seat and wear a lap/shoulderbelt.

To determine if a lap/shoulder beltproperly fits a child, have the childput on the seat belt, then askyourself:

Does the child sit all the way backagainst the seat?

Do the child’s knees bendcomfortably over the edge of theseat?

The following pages giveinstructions on how to check properseat belt fit, what kind of boosterseat to use if one is needed, andimportant precautions for a childwho must sit in front.

1.

2.

CONTINUED

Protecting Larger Children

Checking Seat Belt Fit

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

45

Allowing a child age 12 or underto sit in front can result in injuryor death if the passenger’s frontairbag inflates.

If a child must ride in front,move the vehicle seat as farback as possible, use a boosterseat if needed, have the childsit up properly and wear theseat belt properly.

０４／０８／０５　１０：４１：４１　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　００４８　

Does the shoulder belt crossbetween the child’s neck and arm?

Is the lap part of the belt as low aspossible, touching the child’sthighs?

Will the child be able to stayseated like this for the whole trip?

A child who has outgrown a forward-facing child seat should ride in aback seat and use a booster seatuntil the lap/shoulder belt fits themproperly without the booster.

If you answer yes to all thesequestions, the child is ready to wearthe lap/shoulder belt correctly. Ifyou answer no to any question, thechild needs to ride on a booster seat.

Some states and Canadian provincesalso require children to use a boosterseat until they reach a given age orweight (e.g., 6 years or 60 lbs). Besure to check current laws in thestates or provinces where you intend

to drive.

A child may continue using a boosterseat until the tops of their ears areeven with the top of the vehicle’s orbooster’s seat-back. A child of thisheight should be tall enough to usethe lap/shoulder belt without abooster seat.

If a child who uses a booster seatmust ride in front, move the vehicleseat as far back as possible and besure the child is wearing the seatbelt properly.

Booster seats can be high-back orlow-back. Whichever style you select,make sure the booster seat meetsfederal safety standards (see page

) and that you follow the boosterseat maker’s instructions.

3.

4.

5.38


Using a Booster Seat

46

０４／０８／０５　１０：４１：５１　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　００４９　

If you decide that a child can safelyride up front, be sure to:

Carefully read the owner’s manual,and make sure you understand allseat belt instructions and all safetyinformation.

Move the vehicle seat to the rear-most position.

Have the child sit up straight, backagainst the seat, and feet on ornear the floor.

Check that the child’s seat belt isproperly and securely positioned.

Supervise the child. Even maturechildren sometimes need to bereminded to fasten the seat beltsor sit properly.

To safely ride in front, a child mustbe able to follow the rules, includingsitting properly, and wearing the seatbelt properly throughout a ride.

Of course, children vary widely. Andwhile age may be one indicator ofwhen a child can safely ride in front,there are other important factors youshould consider.

The National Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration and TransportCanada recommend that all childrenage 12 and under be properlyrestrained in a back seat.

If the passenger’s front airbaginflates in a moderate to severefrontal collision, the airbag can causeserious injuries to a child who isunrestrained, improperly restrained,sitting too close to the airbag, or outof position.

A side airbag also poses risks. If anypart of a larger child’s body is in thepath of a deploying side airbag, thechild could receive possibly seriousinjuries.

Physically, a child must be largeenough for the lap/shoulder belt toproperly fit (see pages and ). Ifthe seat belt does not fit properly,with or without the child sitting on abooster seat, the child should not sitin front.

14 45


Maturity

Physical Size

When Can a Larger Child Sit inFront

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

47

０４／０８／０５　１０：４２：０５　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　００５０　

This could resultin serious neck injuries during acrash.

Devices intended toimprove a child’s comfort orreposition the shoulder part of aseat belt can make the belt lesseffective and increase the chanceof serious injury in a crash.

This couldcause very serious injuries duringa crash. It also increases thechance that the child will slideunder the belt in a crash and beinjured.



Do not let a child wear a seat beltacross the neck.

Do not put any accessories on aseat belt.

Do not let a child put the shoulderpart of a seat belt behind the backor under the arm.

Two children should never use thesame seat belt.


48

０４／０８／０５　１０：４２：１２　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　００５１　

Your vehicle’s exhaust containscarbon monoxide gas. You shouldhave no problem with carbonmonoxide entering the vehicle innormal driving if you maintain yourvehicle properly.

High levels of carbon monoxide cancollect rapidly in enclosed areas,such as a garage. Do not run theengine with the garage door closed.Even with the door open, run theengine only long enough to move thevehicle out of the garage.

With the trunk open, airflow can pullexhaust gas into your vehicle’sinterior and create a hazardouscondition. If you must drive with thetrunk open, open all the windows andset the heating and cooling system/climate control system as shownbelow.

If you must sit in your parked vehiclewith the engine running, even in anunconfined area, adjust the heatingand cooling system/climate controlsystem as follows:

Select the fresh air mode.Select the mode.Turn the fan on high speed.Set the temperature control to acomfortable setting.

Have the exhaust system inspectedfor leaks whenever:

The vehicle is raised for an oilchange.

You notice a change in the soundof the exhaust.

The vehicle was in an accidentthat may have damaged theunderside.

1.2.3.4.

Carbon Monoxide HazardD

riverand

Passenger

Safety

49

Carbon monoxide gas is toxic.Breathing it can causeunconsciousness and even killyou.

Avoid any enclosed areas oractivities that expose you tocarbon monoxide.

０４／０８／０５　１０：４２：２２　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　００５２　

These labels are in the locationsshown. They warn you of potentialhazards that could cause seriousinjury. Read these labels carefully.

If a label comes off or becomes hardto read (except for the U.S.dashboard label which may beremoved by the owner), contact yourdealer for a replacement.

U.S. models

Canadian models

U.S. models only

Safety Labels

50

HOOD

DASHBOARD

RADIATOR CAP

０４／０８／０５　１０：４２：４１　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　００５３　

U.S. models

Canadian models

U.S. models Canadian models

Safety LabelsD

riverand

Passenger

Safety

51

SUN VISOR DOORJAMBS

０４／０８／０５　１０：４２：５９　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　００５４　

52

０４／０８／０５　１０：４３：０４　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　００５５　

This section gives information aboutthe controls and displays thatcontribute to the daily operation ofyour vehicle. All the essentialcontrols are within easy reach.

...........................Control Locations . 54..............................Instument Panel . 55

...........Instument Panel Indicators . 56.............................................Gauges . 63

.....................................Odometer . 63Outside Temperature

...................................Indicator . 64

...................................Trip Meter . 64...................Temperature Gauge . 65

..................................Fuel Gauge . 65..........Check Fuel Cap Indicator . 65

Controls Near the Steering...........................................Wheel . 66

.Windshield Wipers and Washers . 67...........Turn Signal and Headlights . 68

........Instrument Panel Brightness . 70.................Hazard Warning Button . 70.................Rear Window Defogger . 71

..........Steering Wheel Adjustment . 72...............................Keys and Locks . 73

........................Immobilizer System . 74................................Ignition Switch . 75

..........................Power Door Locks . 76.......................Remote Transmitter . 77

................................................Trunk . 80........Emergency Trunk Opener . 80

.................................................Seats . 81....................................Seat Heaters . 88

..............................Power Windows . 89.........................................Moonroof . 92

.............................................Mirrors . 93.................................Parking Brake . 94

...........Interior Convenience Items . 95....................................Glove Box . 96

.......................Beverage Holders . 96...............Console Compartment . 97

.......................Center CD Pocket . 97.................................Coin Pocket . 98

......................................Sun Visor . 98..............................Vanity Mirror . 98

....................................Coat Hook . 99......................Sunglasses Holder . 99

..........Accessory Power Sockets . 99...............................Interior Lights . 100

Instruments and ControlsInstrum

entsand

Controls

53

０４／０８／０５　１０：４３：０９　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　００５６　

Control Locations

54

MIRROR CONTROLS

POWER WINDOWSWITCHES

HOOD RELEASEHANDLE

AUDIO SYSTEM

POWER DOOR LOCKMASTER SWITCH

CLIMATE CONTROLSYSTEM

HEATING/COOLINGCONTROLS

HAZARD WARNINGBUTTON

INSTRUMENT PANEL INDICATORSGAUGES

ACCESSORYPOWER SOCKETS

FUEL FILLDOOR/TRUNKRELEASEHANDLE

SEAT HEATERSWITCH

(P.63)(P.55)

(P.93)

(P.76)

(P.89)

(P.161, 80)

(P.162) (P.88) (P.99)

(P.111)

(P.104)

(P.150)

(P.70)

(P.116)CLOCK

０４／０８／０５　１０：４３：１６　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　００５７　

＊

＊

＊The U.S. instrument panel is shown. Differences for the Canadian models are noted in the text.

Instrument PanelInstrum

entsand

Controls

55

LOW FUEL INDICATOR

MAINTENANCE REQUIREDINDICATOR

HIGH BEAM INDICATOR

CRUISE MAIN INDICATOR

ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEMINDICATOR

LOW OIL PRESSUREINDICATOR

CHARGING SYSTEMINDICATOR

SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR

SUPPLEMENTALRESTRAINT SYSTEMINDICATOR

TCS ACTIVATION INDICATOR

CRUISE CONTROL INDICATOR

DOOR AND TRUNKOPEN MONITOR

LIGHTS ON INDICATORPARKING BRAKE AND BRAKESYSTEM INDICATOR

TRACTION CONTROL SYSTEM (TCS)INDICATOR

MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP

IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM INDICATOR

SEAT BELT REMINDER INDICATOR

(P.58)

(P.61)

(P.58)

(P.59)

(P.61)

(P.59)

(P.57)

(P.60, 151)

(P.56)

(P.60)

(P.57, 262)

(P.261)

(P.56, 260)

(P.56, 260)

(P.61)

(P.61)

(P.58)

SIDE AIRBAG OFFINDICATOR (P.57)

(P.60)

０４／０８／０５　１０：４３：２４　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　００５８　

The instrument panel has manyindicators to give you importantinformation about your vehicle. The engine can be severely damaged

if this indicator flashes or stays onwhen the engine is running. Formore information, see page .

If this indicator comes on when theengine is running, the battery is notbeing charged. For more information,see page .

See page .

This indicator comes on when youturn the ignition switch to ON (II). Itreminds you and your passengers tofasten your seat belts. A beeper alsosounds if you have not fastened yourseat belt.

If you turn the ignition switch to ON(II) before fastening your seat belt,the beeper sounds and the indicatorflashes. If you do not fasten yourseat belt before the beeper stops, theindicator stops flashing but remainson.

If you continue driving withoutfastening your seat belt, the beepersounds and the indicator flashesagain at regular intervals.

260

260

261

Instrument Panel Indicators

Seat Belt ReminderIndicator

Low Oil PressureIndicator

Charging SystemIndicator

Malfunction IndicatorLamp

56

０４／０８／０５　１０：４３：３５　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　００５９　

This indicator has two functions:

This indicator comes on briefly whenyou turn the ignition switch to ON(II). If it comes on at any other time,it indicates a potential problem withyour front airbags. This indicator willalso alert you to a potential problemwith your side airbags, passenger’sside airbag automatic cutoff system,side curtain airbags, automatic seatbelt tensioners, driver’s seat positionsensor, or the front passenger’sweight sensors. For moreinformation, see page .

This indicator comes on when youturn the ignition switch to ON (II). Ifit comes on at any other time, itindicates that the passenger’s sideairbag has automatically shut off.For more information, see page .

It comes on when you turn theignition switch to ON (II). It is areminder to check the parkingbrake. A beeper sounds if you tryto drive with the parking brake notfully released. Driving with theparking brake not fully releasedcan damage the brakes and tires.

If it remains lit after you fullyrelease the parking brake whilethe engine is running, or if itcomes on while driving, therecould be a problem with the brakesystem. For more information, seepage .

1.

2.

28

262

27


Parking Brake and Brake SystemIndicator

Supplemental RestraintSystem Indicator

Side Airbag Off Indicator

Instruments

andC

ontrols

57

U.S. Canada U.S. Canada

０４／０８／０５　１０：４３：４８　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　００６０　

This indicator normally comes on fora few seconds when you turn theignition switch to ON (II). If it comeson at any other time, there is aproblem in the ABS. If this happens,have your vehicle checked at adealer. With this indicator on, yourvehicle still has normal brakingability but no anti-lock function. Formore information, see page .

This indicator has three functions: This indicator normally comes on fora few seconds when you turn theignition switch to ON (II). If it comeson and stays on with the TCSactivation indicator, there is aproblem with the TCS. For moreinformation on the TCS, see page

.

This indicator also comes on for afew seconds when you turn theignition switch to ON (II). If it comeson and stays on at any other time, orit does not come on when you turnthe ignition switch to ON (II), thereis a problem with the TCS. Take thevehicle to your dealer to have itchecked. See page for moreinformation on the TCS.

If it comes on and stays on whenthe TCS is on, it indicates thatthere is a problem in the TCS.

It flashes when the TCS isregulating wheelspin.

It comes on as a reminder that youhave turned off the tractioncontrol system (TCS).

1.

2.

3.185

187

187

On all V6 models On all V6 models


Anti-lock Brake System(ABS) Indicator

TCS Activation Indicator Traction Control System(TCS) Indicator

58

０４／０８／０５　１０：４３：５９　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　００６１　

This indicator also blinks severaltimes when you turn the ignitionswitch from ON (II) to ACCESSORY(I) or LOCK (0).

The appropriate indicator comes onin this monitor if the trunk or eitherdoor is not closed tightly.

All the indicators in the monitorcome on for a few seconds when youturn the ignition switch to ON (II).

This indicator comes on for a fewseconds when you turn the ignitionswitch to ON (II). It will then go offif you have inserted a properly-codedignition key. If it is not a properly-coded key, the indicator will blink,and the engine will not start (seepage ).

The left or right turn signal indicatorblinks when you signal a lane changeor turn. If the indicator does notblink or blinks rapidly, it usuallymeans one of the turn signal bulbs isburned out (see page ). Replacethe bulb as soon as possible, sinceother drivers cannot see that you aresignaling.

When you press the hazard warningbutton, both turn signal indicatorsblink. All turn signals on the outsideof the vehicle should flash.

74231


Immobilizer SystemIndicator

Door and Trunk Open Monitor Turn Signal andHazard WarningIndicators

Instruments

andC

ontrols

59

０４／０８／０５　１０：４４：１１　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　００６２　

This indicator reminds you that theexterior lights are on. It comes onwhen the light switch is in either the

or position. If you turn theignition switch to ACCESSORY (I)or LOCK (0) without turning off thelight switch, this indicator willremain on. A reminder chime willalso sound when you open the driver’sdoor.

This indicator is located in the fuelgauge. It comes on as a reminderthat you must refuel soon.

This indicator comes on when thesecurity system is set. See page

for more information on thesecurity system.151

If equipped


Lights On Indicator Security System IndicatorLow Fuel Indicator

60


LOW FUEL INDICATOR

０４／０８／０５　１０：４４：２１　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　００６３　

CONTINUED

This indicator comes on when youturn the ignition switch to ON (II)with the headlight switch off and theparking brake set. It should go off ifyou turn on the headlights or releasethe parking brake. If it comes on atany other time, it means there is aproblem with the DRL. There mayalso be a problem with the highbeam headlights.

This indicator comes on when youset the cruise control. See page

for information on operating thecruise control.

This indicator comes on with thehigh beam headlights. For moreinformation, see page .

This indicator comes on when thewasher fluid level is low. Add washerfluid when you see this indicator(see page ).On Canadian models, this indicator

comes on with reduced brightnesswhen the daytime running lights(DRL) are on (see page ).

This indicator reminds you that it istime to take your vehicle in for thescheduled maintenance. Theindicator does not reflect severemaintenance intervals.

Refer to the maintenance schedulefor normal and severe drivingconditions on page (4-cylindermodels) or page (6-cylindermodels).

This indicator comes on when youturn on the cruise control system bypressing the CRUISE button (seepage ).

152

68

220

69

201206

152

Canadian models only


‘‘Daytime RunningLights’’ Indicator

High Beam Indicator

Cruise Main Indicator

Cruise Control Indicator

Washer Level Indicator

Maintenance RequiredIndicator

Instrument Panel IndicatorsInstrum

entsand

Controls

61

０４／０８／０５　１０：４４：３８　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　００６４　

Between 8,000 miles (12,800 km)and 10,000 miles (16,000 km), thisindicator will light for 2 secondswhen you first turn the ignitionswitch to ON (II), and then flash for10 seconds.

If you exceed 10,000 miles (16,000km) without having the scheduledmaintenance performed, thisindicator will remain on as a constantreminder.

Turn off the engine.

Between 6,000 miles (9,600 km) and7,500 miles (12,000 km), it will lightfor 2 seconds when you first turn theignition switch to ON (II), and thenflash for 10 seconds.

Press and hold the Select/Resetknob on the instrument panel,then turn the ignition switch toON (II).

Hold the knob for about 10seconds until the indicator goesoff.

If you exceed 7,500 miles (12,000km) without having the scheduledmaintenance performed, thisindicator will remain on as a constantreminder.

Your dealer will reset this indicatorafter completing the scheduledmaintenance. If this maintenance isdone by someone other than yourdealer, reset the indicator as follows.

For the first 8,000 miles (12,800 km)after the maintenance requiredindicator is reset, it will come on for2 seconds when you turn the ignitionswitch to ON (II).

For the first 6,000 miles (9,600 km)after the maintenance requiredindicator is reset, it will come on for2 seconds when you turn the ignitionswitch to ON (II).

1.

2.

3.

4-cylinder models 6-cylinder models


62

SELECT/RESET KNOB

０４／０８／０５　１０：４４：５０　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　００６５　

The gauges illuminate when youturn the ignition switch to ON (II).

The odometer shows the totaldistance your vehicle has beendriven. It measures miles in U.S.models and kilometers in Canadianmodels. It is illegal under U.S.federal law and Canadian provincialregulations to disconnect, reset, oralter the odometer with the intent tochange the number of miles orkilometers indicated.

The odometer and the outsidetemperature indicator use the samedisplay. To switch the displaybetween the odometer and theoutside temperature, press theSelect/Reset knob. When you turnthe ignition switch to ON (II), whatyou last selected is displayed.

Gauges

Odometer

Instruments

andC

ontrols

63

TACHOMETER SPEEDOMETER FUEL GAUGE

SELECT/RESETKNOB

MAINTENANCEREQUIREDINDICATOR

TEMPERATUREGAUGE

U.S. model is shown.

TRIP METER

ODOMETER/OUTSIDETEMPERATURE INDICATOR/CHECKFUEL CAP INDICATOR

０４／０８／０５　１０：４４：５９　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　００６６　

－－－－－－－－

± ±This meter shows the number ofmiles (U.S.) or kilometers (Canada)driven since you last reset it.

There are two trip meters: Trip Aand Trip B. Switch between thesedisplays and the odometer/outsidetemperature display by pressing theSelect/Reset knob repeatedly. Eachtrip meter works independently, soyou can keep track of two differentdistances.

When you turn the ignition switch toON (II), what you last selected isdisplayed.

In certain weather conditions,temperature readings near freezing(32°F, 0°C) could mean that ice isforming on the road surface.

When it reaches the desired value,release the Select/Reset knob. Youshould see the new outsidetemperature displayed.

NOTE: The temperature must bestabilized before doing thisprocedure.

Select the outside temperaturedisplay, then press the Select/Resetknob for ten seconds. The followingsequence will appear for one secondeach: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 5, 4, 3, 2,

1, 0 (U.S.) or 0, 1, 2, 3, 3, 2,1, 0 (Canada).

If the outside temperature isincorrectly displayed, you can adjustit 5°F in U.S. models ( 3°C inCanadian models) warmer or cooler.

To reset a trip meter, display it andthen press and hold the Select/Resetknob until the number resets to ‘‘0.0.’’Both trip meters will reset if thevehicle’s battery goes dead or isdisconnected.

This indicator displays the outsidetemperature in Fahrenheit (U.S.models) or Centigrade (Canadianmodels). To see the outsidetemperature, press and release theSelect/Reset knob until thetemperature is displayed.

The temperature sensor is in thefront bumper. Therefore, thetemperature reading can be affectedby heat reflection from the roadsurface, engine heat, and theexhaust from surrounding traffic.This can cause an incorrecttemperature reading when yourspeed is under 19 mph (30 km/h).

The sensor delays the display updateuntil it reaches the correct outsidetemperature. This may take severalminutes.

On 4-cylinder EX with Leather and 6-cylinder EX models, and all EX modelsin Canada

Gauges

Outside Temperature Indicator Trip Meter

64

０４／０８／０５　１０：４５：１３　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　００６７　

This shows how much fuel you have.It may show slightly more or lessthan the actual amount. The needlereturns to the bottom after you turnoff the ignition.

This shows the temperature of theengine’s coolant. During normaloperation, the pointer should risefrom the bottom white mark to aboutthe middle of the gauge. In severedriving conditions, such as very hotweather or a long period of uphilldriving, the pointer may rise into theupper half of the gauge. If it reachesthe red (Hot) mark, pull safely to theside of the road. See page forinstructions and precautions onchecking the engine’s coolingsystem.

Turn the engine off and confirm thefuel fill cap is installed. If it is, loosenthe cap, then retighten it at least 3clicks. When you restart the engine,the message appears again. To clear,press and hold the Select/Resetknob until the message is replacedby the odometer/outsidetemperature display.

If the system still detects a loose ormissing fuel fill cap, the malfunctionindicator lamp (MIL) comes on.Turn the engine off and check orretighten the fuel fill cap at least 3clicks. The MIL goes out after 3 daysof normal driving once the cap istightened or replaced. If it does notgo out, have your dealer inspect thevehicle. For more information, seepage .

If your fuel fill cap is loose ormissing, a ‘‘CHECK FUEL CAP’’message appears as text in theodometer/outside temperaturedisplay after you start the engine.The message appears from CHECKto FUEL, then to CAP repeatedly.

258

261

Temperature Gauge Fuel Gauge

Check Fuel Cap Indicator

GaugesInstrum

entsand

Controls

65

Avoid driving with an extremely lowf uel level. Running out of f uel couldcause the engine to misf ire, damagingthe catalytic converter.

０４／０８／０５　１０：４５：２３　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　００６８　

＊

＊

To use the horn, press the pad around the ‘‘H’’ logo.

Controls Near the Steering Wheel

66

EX-V6 model without navigation system is shown.

CRUISE CONTROLSTILT/TELESCOPIC ADJUSTMENT

REMOTE AUDIOCONTROLS

MOONROOFSWITCH

TRACTION CONTROLSYSTEM ON/OFF SWITCH

HEADLIGHTS/TURN SIGNALS

HORN INSTRUMENT PANELBRIGHTNESS

WINDSHIELDWIPERS/WASHERS

REAR WINDOWDEFOGGER

AUDIO SYSTEM

HAZARD WARNINGBUTTON

PASSENGERAIRBAG OFFINDICATOR(P.68)

(P.70)(P.67)

(P.28)

(P.70)

(P.116)

(P.71)

(P.152)(P.72)

(P.188)

(P.92)

(P.148)

０４／０８／０５　１０：４５：２９　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　００６９　

－－－

－

－

－

－－

－

MISTOFFINT IntermittentLO Low speedHI High speedWindshield Washers

Push the right lever up or down toselect a position.

The wipers are not activated.

Vary the delay by turning the INTTIME ring.

If you turn it to the shortest delay,the wipers will change to lowspeed operation when the vehiclespeed exceeds 12 mph (20 km/h).

While the vehicle is stopped and ingear, the wipers sweep thewindshield whenever you removeyour foot from the brake pedal.

The wipers run at low speed.

The wipers run at high speed.

Pull thewiper control lever toward you andhold it. The washers spray until yourelease the lever. The wipers run atlow speed, then complete one moresweep after you release the lever.

The wipers run at highspeed until you release the lever.

The length of the wiperinterval is varied automaticallyaccording to the vehicle’s speed.

1.2.3.4.5.6

Windshield Wipers and Washers

Windshield Wipers

OFF

LO

HI

Windshield WashersMIST

INT Instruments

andC

ontrols

67

０４／０８／０５　１０：４５：４０　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　００７０　

－

－

－

Turning theswitch to the ‘‘ ’’ position turnson the parking lights, taillights, side-marker lights, and rear license platelights.

Turning the switch to the ‘‘ ’’position turns on the headlights. Ifyou leave the lights on with the keyremoved from the ignition switch,you will hear a reminder chime whenyou open the driver’s door.

Turn signalOffParking and indicator lightsHeadlights onHigh beamsFlash high beams

Push down on theleft lever to signal a left turn and upto signal a right turn. To signal a lanechange, push lightly on the lever andhold it. The lever will return tocenter when you release it orcomplete a turn.

When the light switch is in the‘‘ ’’ or the ‘‘ ’’ position, theLights On indicator comes on as areminder. This indicator stays on ifyou leave the light switch on and

turn the ignition switch to theACCESSORY (I) or LOCK (0)position.

To flash the high beams, pull thelever back lightly, then release it.The high beams will stay on as longas you hold the lever back.

Push the leverforward until you hear a click to turnon the high beams. The blue highbeam indicator will come on (seepage ). Pull the lever back toreturn to the low beams.

1.2.3.4.5.6.

61

Turn Signal and Headlights

Headlights On

Turn Signal

High Beams

68

０４／０８／０５　１０：４５：５０　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　００７１　

This feature turns off the headlights,parking lights, taillights, and licenseplate lights within 15 seconds ofremoving the key from the ignitionswitch and closing the driver’s door.

This feature activates if you leavethe headlight switch in the ‘‘ ’’or ‘‘ ’’ position, remove the key,then open and close the driver’s door.

If you remove the key from theignition switch with the headlightswitch on, but do not open the doorand get out, the lights will turn offafter 10 minutes.

The lights will turn on again whenyou unlock or open the driver’s door.

With the headlight switch off, thehigh beam headlights and the highbeam indicator come on withreduced brightness when you turnthe ignition switch to ON (II) andrelease the parking brake. Theyremain on until you turn the ignitionswitch off, even if you set theparking brake.

If you unlock the door, but do notopen it within 15 seconds, the lightswill go off. With the driver’s dooropen, you will hear a lights-onreminder chime.

The headlights revert to normaloperation when you turn them onwith the switch.


Headlights

Automatic Lighting Off Feature Daytime Running Lights

Instruments

andC

ontrols

69

０４／０８／０５　１０：４６：００　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　００７２　

The Select/Reset knob on theinstrument panel controls thebrightness of the instrument panellights. Turn the knob to adjust thebrightness.

The instrument panel will illuminatewith reduced brightness when youunlock and open the driver’s door.The brightness will increase slightlywhen you insert the key in theignition switch, then go to normal

brightness when you turn theignition switch to ON (II).

If you do not insert the key in theignition switch after opening thedriver’s door, the illumination turnsoff in about 30 seconds after closingthat door.

If you insert the key but do not turnthe ignition switch to ON (II), theillumination turns off in about 10seconds.

To reduce glare at night, the instru-ment panel illumination dims whenyou turn the light switch to or

. Turning the Select/Resetknob fully to the right until you heara click will cancel the reduced bright-ness.

Push the button between the centervents to turn on the hazard warninglights (four-way flashers). Thiscauses all four outside turn signalsand both turn indicators in theinstrument panel to flash. Use thehazard warning lights if you need topark in a dangerous area near heavytraffic, or if your vehicle is disabled.

Instrument Panel Brightness Hazard Warning Button

Instrument Panel Brightness, Hazard Warning Button

70

SELECT/RESET KNOB U.S. model is shown

０４／０８／０５　１０：４６：１０　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　００７３　

The rear window defogger will clearfog, frost, and thin ice from thewindow. Push the defogger button toturn it on and off. The indicatorabove/in the button comes on toshow the defogger is on. It also shutsoff when you turn off the ignitionswitch. You have to turn thedefogger on again when you restartthe vehicle.

Make sure the rear window is clearand you have good visibility beforestarting to drive.

The defogger and antenna wires onthe inside of the rear window can beaccidentally damaged. Whencleaning the glass, always wipe sideto side.

Rear Window DefoggerInstrum

entsand

Controls

71

Auto A/C type shown Vehicles with navigation systemManual A/C type shown

０４／０８／０５　１０：４６：１９　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　００７４　

Push the lever up to lock thesteering wheel in position.

Make sure you have securelylocked the steering wheel in placeby trying to move it up, down, in,and out.

Insert the key in the ignitionswitch, and unlock the steeringcolumn.

Push the lever under the steeringcolumn all the way down.

Move the steering wheel so itpoints toward your chest, nottoward your face. Make sure youcan see the instrument panelgauges and indicators.

Make any steering wheel adjustmentbefore you start driving.

3.

4.

5.

2.

1.

Steering Wheel Adjustment

72

Adjusting the steering wheelposition while driving maycause you to lose control of thevehicle and be seriously injuredin a crash.

Adjust the steering wheel onlywhen the vehicle is stopped.

０４／０８／０５　１０：４６：２７　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　００７５　

The master key fits all the locks onyour vehicle. The valet key worksonly in the ignition and the driver’sdoor lock. You can keep the trunkrelease handle, rear seat trunkaccess, and glove box locked whenyou leave your vehicle and the valetkey at a parking facility.

You should have received a keynumber tag with your keys. You willneed this key number if you everhave to get a lost key replaced. Useonly Honda-approved key blanks.

Protect the keys from directsunlight, high temperature, andhigh humidity.

Do not drop the keys or set heavyobjects on them.

Keep the keys away from liquids.If they get wet, dry themimmediately with a soft cloth.

These keys contain electroniccircuits that are activated by theimmobilizer system. They will notwork to start the engine if thecircuits are damaged.

Keys and LocksInstrum

entsand

Controls

73

MASTERKEY WITHREMOTETRANSMITTER

VALET KEY(LIGHT GREY)

KEYNUMBERTAG

０４／０８／０５　１０：４６：３７　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　００７６　

As required by the FCC:This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC rules. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions: (1) This devicemay not cause harmful interference, and(2) this device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may cause undesiredoperation.

Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user’sauthority to operate the equipment.

This device complies with IndustryCanada Standard RSS-210.Operation is subject to the following twoconditions: (1) this device may not causeinterference, and (2) this device mustaccept any interference that may causeundesired operation of the device.

The system may not recognize yourkey’s coding if another immobilizerkey or other metal object (i.e. keyfob) is near the ignition switch whenyou insert the key.

If the system repeatedly does notrecognize the coding of your key,contact your dealer.

Do not attempt to alter this systemor add other devices to it. Electricalproblems could result that may makeyour vehicle undriveable.

If you have lost your key and cannotstart your engine, contact yourdealer.

The immobilizer system protectsyour vehicle from theft. If animproperly-coded key (or otherdevice) is used, the engine’s fuelsystem is disabled.

When you turn the ignition switch toON (II), the immobilizer systemindicator should come on for a fewseconds, then go out. If the indicatorstarts to blink, it means the systemdoes not recognize the coding of thekey. Turn the ignition switch toLOCK (0), remove the key, reinsertit, and turn the switch to ON (II)again.

Immobilizer System

74

０４／０８／０５　１０：４６：４７　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　００７７　

－

－

－

－

The ignition switch has fourpositions: LOCK (0), ACCESSORY(I), ON (II), and START (III).

If the front wheels are turned, theanti-theft lock may make it difficultto turn the key. Firmly turn thesteering wheel to the left or right asyou turn the key.

You can insert orremove the key only in this position.To turn the key, push it in slightly. Ifyour vehicle has an automatictransmission, the shift lever mustalso be in park.

You will hear a reminder beeper ifyou leave the key in the ignitionswitch in the LOCK (0) orACCESSORY (I) position and openthe driver’s door. Remove the key toturn off the beeper.

If your vehicle has an automatictransmission, the shift lever must bein Park before you can remove thekey from the ignition switch.

You canoperate the audio system and theaccessory power sockets in thisposition.

This is the normal keyposition when driving. Several of theindicators on the instrument panelcome on as a test when you turn theignition switch from ACCESSORY(I) to ON (II).

Use this positiononly to start the engine. The switchreturns to ON (II) when you let go ofthe key.

Ignition Switch

LOCK (0)

ACCESSORY (I)

ON (II)

START (III)

Instruments

andC

ontrols

75

Removing the key from theignition switch while drivinglocks the steering. This cancause you to lose control.

Remove the key from theignition switch only whenparked.

０４／０８／０５　１０：４６：５６　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　００７８　

You can open or close the windowsby using the key in the driver’s door(see page ).

To unlock only the driver’s doorfrom the outside, turn the key andrelease it. If you turn it again, bothdoors unlock.

The lock tab on the passenger’s doorlocks and unlocks only that door.Pulling up on the driver’s door locktab only unlocks the driver’s door.

Pushing the bottom of either masterdoor lock switch will unlock bothdoors.

To lock the passenger’s door whengetting out of the vehicle, push thelock tab down and close the door. Tolock the driver’s door, remove thekey from the ignition switch andpush the lock tab down or push thetop of the master switch, then closethe door.

With the driver’s door open and thekey in the ignition, both master doorlock switches are disabled. They arenot disabled if the driver’s door isclosed. Pushing the top of the switchon the open passenger’s door willlock both doors.

To lock the doors, push the top ofthe master door lock switch oneither door, press the lock tab downon the driver’s door, or use the keyon the outside lock on the driver’sdoor.

91

Power Door Locks

Lockout Prevention

76

MASTER DOOR LOCK SWITCH LOCK TAB

０４／０８／０５　１０：４７：０６　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　００７９　

－

－

－

－

CONTINUED

Press this button once tolock both doors. Some exterior lightswill flash once. When you pushLOCK twice within 5 seconds, youwill hear a beep to verify that thedoors are locked and (if equipped)that the security system has set. Youcannot lock the doors if either dooris not fully closed or the key is in theignition switch.

You can also open both powerwindows from outside the vehiclewith the remote transmitter (seepage ).

Press thisbutton for about 1 second to openthe trunk. You cannot open the trunkif the key is in the ignition switch.

Press this button forabout 2 seconds to attract attention:the horn will sound and the exteriorlights will flash for about 30 seconds.To cancel panic mode, press anyother button on the remotetransmitter, or turn the ignitionswitch to ON (II).

Press this button onceto unlock the driver’s door. Push ittwice to unlock the passenger’s door.Some exterior lights will flash twiceeach time you push the button.

The ceiling light (if the ceiling lightswitch is in the center position) andthe spotlights (if the switch is in theDoor position) will come on whenyou press the UNLOCK button. Ifyou do not open either door within30 seconds, the lights fade out. If yourelock the doors with the remotetransmitter before 30 seconds haveelapsed, the lights will go offimmediately.

If you do not open either door within30 seconds, the doors automaticallyrelock, and the security system sets(except for 4-cylinder LX model).You cannot unlock it if the key is inthe ignition switch.

90

Remote Transmitter

LOCK

TRUNK RELEASE

PANIC

UNLOCK

Instruments

andC

ontrols

77

UNLOCKBUTTON

LOCKBUTTON

TRUNKRELEASEBUTTON

PANICBUTTON

LED

０４／０８／０５　１０：４７：１９　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　００８０　

Avoid dropping or throwing thetransmitter.

Protect the transmitter fromextreme temperature.

Do not immerse the transmitter inany liquid.

If you lose a transmitter, thereplacement needs to bereprogrammed by your dealer.

Remove the screw at the base ofthe transmitter with a smallPhillips-head screwdriver.

To replace the battery:

If it takes several pushes on thebutton to lock or unlock the doors,replace the battery as soon aspossible.Battery type: CR1616 Inside the transmitter, separate

the inner cover from the keypadby releasing the two tabs on thecover.

Separate the transmitter by pryingits middle seam with yourfingernail.

1.

2.

3.

Remote Transmitter

Remote Transmitter Care Replacing the TransmitterBattery

78

SCREWTAB

BATTERY

０４／０８／０５　１０：４７：３３　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　００８１　

＋




Remove the old battery from theback of the inner cover, and inserta new battery into the back of thecover with the side facing down.

Install the parts in reverse order.

4.

5.

Remote TransmitterInstrum

entsand

Controls

79

０４／０８／０５　１０：４７：３９　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　００８２　

Keep the trunk lid closed at all timeswhile driving to avoid damaging thelid, and to prevent exhaust gas fromgetting into the interior. See

on page .

To protect items in the trunk whenyou need to give the key to someoneelse:

Lock the trunk release handlewith the master key.

Give the person the valet key.

As a safety feature, your vehicle hasa release lever on the trunk latch sothe trunk can be opened from theinside. To open the trunk, push therelease lever to the left.

Parents should decide if theirchildren should be shown how to usethis feature. For more informationabout child safety, see page .

You can open the trunk in two ways:

Pull the trunk release handle tothe left of the driver’s seat.

Press and hold the trunk releasebutton on the remote transmitter.

To close the trunk, press down onthe trunk lid.

1.

2.35

49

Trunk

CarbonMonoxide Hazard

Emergency Trunk Opener

80

Pull

TRUNK RELEASE HANDLE

MASTERKEY

０４／０８／０５　１０：４７：５３　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　００８３　

－

The 4-cylinder EX model has apower seat bottom heightadjustment. All other driver’s seatadjustments in this model aremanual.

The 4-cylinder LX model has manualdriver’s seat adjustments (see nextcolumn).

The front passenger’s seat in allmodels adjusts manually.

To adjust the seat forward andbackward, pull up on the bar underthe seat cushion’s front edge. Movethe seat to the desired position andrelease the bar. Try to move the seatto make sure it is locked in position.

Make all seat adjustments beforeyou start driving.

All V6 models and the 4-cylinder EXwith Leather models have a poweradjustable driver’s seat.

To change the seat-back angle of thefront seat, pull up on the lever on theoutside of the seat bottom.

See pages for important safetyinformation and warnings about how toproperly position the seats and seat-backs.

11 13

Seats

Manual Seat Adjustments

Instruments

andC

ontrols

81

０４／０８／０５　１０：４８：０５　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　００８４　

The height of your driver’s seat isadjustable. To raise the seat bottom,repeatedly pull up the lever on theoutside of the seat cushion. To lowerthe seat, push the lever downrepeatedly.


Make sure to pull the lever upwardor downward to its full range.

The height of your driver’s seat ispower adjustable. Pull up on theswitch to raise the seat. Push it downto lower the seat.


On 4-cylinder EX modelOn 4-cylinder LX model

Seats

Driver’s Seat Manual HeightAdjustment

Driver’s Seat Power HeightAdjustment

82

０４／０８／０５　１０：４８：１５　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　００８５　

－See pages for important safetyinformation and warnings about how toproperly position the seats and seat-backs.

11 13

On all V6 models, and the 4-cylinder EXwith Leather model

The controls for the adjustabledriver’s power seat are on theoutside edge of the seat bottom. Youcan adjust the power seat with theignition switch in any position. Makeall seat adjustments before you startdriving.

Moving the long horizontal switchadjusts the seat bottom in severaldirections. The seat bottom adjustsin the direction you move the switch.The short vertical switch adjusts theseat-back angle.

Raises or lowers theseat.

Adjusts the seat-back angle forwardor backward.

Moves the front ofthe seat up or downand the rear of theseat up or down.

Moves the seatforward andbackward.

Seats

Power Seat Adjustments

Instruments

andC

ontrols

83

０４／０８／０５　１０：４８：２８　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　００８６　

To change the lumbar support, movethe lever on the right side of theseat-back forward or backward.Keep moving the lever forward orbackward until you find a suitableposition.

To use the console lid as an armrest,slide it to the desired position.

Make sure the passenger’s hands orfingers are away from the armrestbefore moving it.

To get into the rear seat on thedriver’s side, open the door and pullthe release lever up on the side ofthe seat-back. The seat-back will tiltforward to allow easier entry to therear seat.

On all EX and EX-V6 modelsOn all V6 models and 4-cylinder EX withLeather model

Seats

Driver’s Lumbar Support Armrest Rear Seat AccessDriver’s Side

84

RELEASE LEVER

０４／０８／０５　１０：４８：３８　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　００８７　

To get into the rear seat on thepassenger’s side, push downward onthe release lever at the base of theseat-back. The seat-back will tiltforward and the entire seat will moveforward to allow easier entry to therear seat.

After a passenger gets into the backseat, push the seat-back to theupright position and push the wholeseat backwards until it latches. Makesure the seat is fully latched beforesitting in it.

To get into the rear seat on thedriver’s side, open the door and pullup on the seat-back adjustment lever.The seat-back will tilt forward toallow easier entry to the rear seat.

On LX and EX models

Seats

Passenger’s Side

Instruments

andC

ontrols

85

SEAT-BACK ADJUSTMENT LEVER

RELEASE LEVER

To avoid damaging the seat-back angleadjustment motor, do not operate theseat-back angle switch when the seat-back is tilted f orward.

０４／０８／０５　１０：４８：４７　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　００８８　

See page for important safetyinformation and a warning about how toproperly position the head restraints.

13

The head restraints help protect youand your passengers from whiplashand other injuries.

Your vehicle has adjustable headrestraints on the front seats. Theyare also on the outside positions ofthe rear seat.

They are most effective when youadjust them so the back of theoccupant’s head rests against thecenter of the restraint.

The head restraints adjust for height.You need both hands to adjust therestraint. Do not attempt to adjust itwhile driving. To raise it, pull upward.To lower the restraint, push therelease button sideways and pushthe restraint down.

Seats

Head Restraints

86

RELEASE BUTTON

FRONT REAR

０４／０８／０５　１０：４８：５５　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　００８９　

CONTINUED

When storing cargo, you can movethe rear center shoulder belt out ofthe way by removing the belt fromthe guide.

Do not put any heavy items on theseat-back when it is folded.

To release the seat-back from insidethe trunk, pull the release under thetrunk panel. Push the seat-backdown, then let go of the release.

To lock the seat-back upright, push itfirmly against the trunk panel. Makesure it is latched in place by pullingon the top of the seat.

The left and right halves of the rearseat can be folded separately frominside the vehicle or inside the trunk.To fold down the seat-back frominside the vehicle, insert the masterkey in the lock on the rear shelf. Tofold down the driver’s side, turn thekey clockwise, pull down the top ofthe seat-back, then release the key.To fold down the passenger’s side,turn the key counterclockwise andperform the same procedure.

Seats

Folding Rear Seat

Instruments

andC

ontrols

87

GUIDE

Pull

CENTERSHOULDER BELTMASTER KEY

０４／０８／０５　１０：４９：０５　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　００９０　

Make sure all rear shoulder belts arepositioned in front of the rear seat-back whenever the seat-back is in itsupright position.

Make sure all items in the trunk, oritems extending through the openinginto the back seat, are secured.Loose items can fly forward andcause injury if you have to brakehard. See on page

.

Never drive with the seat-backfolded down and the trunk lid open.See onpage . Both front seats are equipped with

seat heaters. The passenger seatonly has heaters in the seat bottombecause of side airbag system. Theignition switch must be in the ON(II) position to use the heaters.

Push the front of the switch, HI, torapidly heat up the seat. After theseat reaches a comfortable

temperature, select LO by pushingthe back of the switch. This will keepthe seat warm.

In HI, the heater turns off when theseat gets warm, and turns back onafter the seat’s temperature drops.

In LO, the heater runs continuously.It does not cycle with temperaturechanges.

Follow these precautions wheneveryou use the seat heaters:

If the engine is left idling for anextended period, do not use theseat heaters, even on the LOsetting. It can weaken the battery,causing hard starting.

Use the HI setting only to heat theseats quickly, because it drawslarge amounts of current from thebattery.

169

49

On EX-V6 model and EX with Leathermodel

Seat Heaters

Carrying Cargo

Carbon Monoxide Hazard

Seats, Seat Heaters

88

SEATHEATERSWITCH

０４／０８／０５　１０：４９：１７　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　００９１　

－

CONTINUED

Turn the ignition switch to ON (II)to raise or lower either window. Toopen the window, push the switchdown and hold it. Release the switchwhen you want the window to stop.Pull back on the switch and hold it toclose the window.

The windows will operate for up to10 minutes after you turn off theignition switch. Opening either doorcancels this function.

The driver’s armrest has a masterpower window control panel. Toopen the passenger’s window, pushdown on the switch and hold it downuntil the window reaches the desiredposition. To close the window, pullback on the window switch. Releasethe switch when the window gets tothe position you want.

To open the driver’swindow fully, push the windowswitch firmly down, then release it.The window automatically goesdown all the way. To stop thewindow from going all the way down,pull back on the window switchbriefly.

To close the driver’s window fully,pull back the window switch firmly,then release it. The windowautomatically goes all the way up. Tostop the window from going all theway up, push down on the windowswitch briefly.

To open or close the driver’s windowpartially, push down or pull back onthe window switch lightly and hold it.The window will stop when yourelease the switch.

Power Windows

AUTO

Instruments

andC

ontrols

89

MAIN SWITCHDRIVER’S WINDOWSWITCH

Closing a power window onsomeone’s hands or fingers cancause serious injury.

Make sure your passengers areaway from the windows beforeclosing them.

０４／０８／０５　１０：４９：２８　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　００９２　

－

When you push the MAIN switch in,the switch is OFF, and thepassenger’s window cannot be raisedor lowered. To cancel this feature,push on the switch again to get it topop out. Keep the MAIN switch offwhen you have children in thevehicle so they do not injurethemselves by operating the windowunintentionally.

If the driver’swindow runs into any obstacle whileit is closing automatically, it willreverse direction and then stop. Toclose the window, remove theobstacle, then use the window switchagain.

Auto reverse stops sensing when thewindow is almost closed. You shouldalways check that all passengers andobjects are away from the windowbefore closing it.

If your vehicle’s battery isdisconnected or goes dead, or thedriver’s window fuse is removed, theAUTO function will be disabled. Thepower window system needs to bereset after reconnecting the batteryor installing the fuse.

Pull and hold the driver’s windowswitch to close the windowcompletely, then hold the switchfor a second or two more.

Start the engine. Push down andhold the driver’s window switchuntil the window is fully open.

Press the UNLOCK button onceto unlock the driver’s door.

Press the UNLOCK button asecond time, and hold it. Thepassenger’s door unlocks, andboth windows start to open. Tostop the windows, release thebutton.

To open the windows further,press the button again.

If the power windows do not operateproperly after resetting, have yourvehicle checked by your dealer.

You cannot close the windows withthe remote transmitter.

You can open both windows from theoutside with the remote transmitter.

1.

2.

1.

2.

3.

Power Windows

AUTO REVERSE

Opening the Windows with theRemote Transmitter

90

０４／０８／０５　１０：４９：４２　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　００９３　

To close the windows further, turnand hold the key again (within10 seconds).

NOTE: If the window stops beforethe desired position, repeat steps 2and 3.

Turn the key clockwise again, andhold it. Both windows start to open.To stop the windows, release thekey.

To open the windows further, turnand hold the key again (within10 seconds).

NOTE: If the window stops beforethe desired position, repeat steps 2and 3.

To close:Insert the key in the driver’s doorlock.

Turn the key counterclockwiseagain, and hold it. Both windowsstart to close. To stop the windows,release the key.

Turn the key counterclockwise,then release it.

Insert the key in the driver’s doorlock.

Turn the key clockwise, thenrelease it.

To open:

You can open and close the windowswith the key in the driver’s door lock.

1.

2.

3.

4.

3. 4.

1.

2.

Opening/Closing the Windowswith the Key

Power WindowsInstrum

entsand

Controls

91

UNLOCK BUTTON

Open

Close

０４／０８／０５　１０：４９：５６　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　００９４　

To tilt up the back of the moonroof,press and hold the center button( ). To close the moonroof,press and hold the upper part of theswitch ( ). To open themoonroof, press and hold the lowerpart of the switch ( ).

The moonroof has a key-off delay.You can still open and close themoonroof for up to 10 minutes afteryou turn off the ignition switch. Thekey-off delay cancels as soon as youopen either door.

The moonroof can be tilted up in theback for ventilation, or it can be slidback into the roof. Use the switchunder the left dashboard vent tooperate the moonroof. You mustturn the ignition switch to ON (II)for the moonroof to operate.

On all EX and EX-V6 models

Moonroof

92

MOONROOF SWITCH

Opening or closing themoonroof on someone’s handsor fingers can cause seriousinjury.

Make sure all hands and fingersare clear of the moonroofbefore opening or closing it.

If you try to open the moonroof inbelow-f reezing temperatures, or whenit is covered with snow or ice, you candamage the moonroof panel or motor.

０４／０８／０５　１０：５０：０７　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　００９５　

Push or pull the adjustment knobright, left, up, or down to move themirror.

When you finish, turn theadjustment knob to the center(off) position. This turns off theadjustment knob to keep yoursettings.

Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).

Turn the adjustment knob to L(driver’s side) or R (passenger’sside).

Keep the inside and outside mirrorsclean and adjusted for best visibility.Be sure to adjust the mirrors beforeyou start driving.

The inside mirror has day and nightpositions. The night position reducesglare from headlights behind you.Flip the tab on the bottom edge ofthe mirror to select the day or nightposition.

3.

4.

1.

2.

CONTINUED

Mirrors

Adjusting the Power Mirrors

Instruments

andC

ontrols

93

ADJUSTMENT KNOB

TAB

０４／０８／０５　１０：５０：１８　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　００９６　

To apply the parking brake, pull thelever up fully. To release it, pull upslightly, push the button, and lowerthe lever. The parking brakeindicator on the instrument panelshould go out when the parkingbrake is fully released with theengine running (see page ).

If you drive without fully releasingthe parking brake, the beepersounds continuously.

The outside mirrors are heated toremove fog and frost. With theignition switch in the ON (II)position, turn on the heaters bypressing the button. The indicator inthe button comes on as a reminder.Press the button again to turn theheaters off.

57

On all Canadian models

Parking Brake

Mirrors, Parking Brake

94

PARKING BRAKE LEVER

HEATED MIRROR BUTTON Driving the vehicle with the parkingbrake applied can damage the rearbrakes and axle.

０４／０８／０５　１０：５０：２６　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　００９７　

Interior Convenience ItemsInstrum

entsand

Controls

95

COIN POCKET

ACCESSORYPOWER SOCKET

VANITY MIRROR

SUNGLASSESHOLDER

BEVERAGE HOLDER SUN VISOR

ACCESSORYPOWER SOCKET

BEVERAGE HOLDER

COAT HOOK

GLOVE BOX

CONSOLECOMPARTMENT

CENTER POCKET

BEVERAGE HOLDERS

０４／０８／０５　１０：５０：３１　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　００９８　

Open the glove box by pulling thehandle to the left. Close it with a firmpush. Lock or unlock the glove boxwith the master key.

Spilled liquids can damage theupholstery, carpeting, and electricalcomponents in the interior.

Be careful when you are using thebeverage holders. A spilled liquidthat is very hot can scald you or yourpassengers. Liquid can also spillfrom the door pocket beverageholders when you open or close thedoors. Use only resealablecontainers in the door pockets.

The glove box light comes on onlywhen the parking lights are on.

Glove Box Beverage Holders

Interior Convenience Items

96

GLOVE BOX

An open glove box can causeserious injury to your passengerin a crash, even if thepassenger is wearing the seatbelt.

Always keep the glove boxclosed while driving.

０４／０８／０５　１０：５０：４０　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　００９９　

To open the console compartment,pull up on the right lever and lift thearmrest.

To close, lower the armrest, andpush it down until it latches.

You can put small items in the traylocated in the console compartmentlid. To use the tray, pull up on theleft lever and lift up the armrest.

The tray in the console compartmenthas a coin holder.

To open the center CD pocket, pushdown on the center of the lid tounlatch it. It will swing openautomatically. To close it, push thelid down until it latches. This pocketcan store up to 12 CDs.

On U.S. vehicles without navigationsystem and all Canadian models

Console Compartment Center CD Pocket


entsand

Controls

97

CONSOLE COMPARTMENT

RIGHT LEVER LEFT LEVER

Push

０４／０８／０５　１０：５０：５０　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０１００　

To use the sun visor, pull it down.When using the sun visor for theside window, remove the support rodfrom the clip, and swing it out.

To open the coin pocket, push thetop of the lid. To close it, push the liddown until it latches. Thecompartment cannot be used as anashtray. In this position, the sun visor can be

adjusted by moving it on its slider.

Make sure you put the sun visorback in place when you are gettinginto or out of the vehicle.

Pull up the vanity mirror cover to useit. The lights beside the mirror comeon when you pull up the cover.

Do not use the sun visor extensionover the inside mirror.

Sun VisorCoin Pocket Vanity Mirror

Interior Convenience Items

98

SUN VISOR

０４／０８／０５　１０：５１：０３　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０１０１　

These sockets are intended to supplypower for 12 volt DC accessoriesthat are rated 120 watts or less (10amps).

To use an accessory power socket,the ignition switch must be inACCESSORY (I) or ON (II).

None of the sockets will power anautomotive type cigarette lighterelement. When more than onesocket is being used, the combinedpower rating of the accessoriesshould be 120 watts or less(10 amps).

To open the sunglasses holder, pushon the front edge. Make sure theholder is closed while you are driving.Some larger styles of sunglassesmay not fit in the holder.

You may also store small items inthis holder. Make sure they aresmall enough to let the holder closeand latch, and that they are notheavy enough to cause the holder topop open while driving.

To use a coat hook, pull it down.Close it with a firm push.

Make sure the coat hook is closedwhen you are not using it. This hookis not designed for large or heavyitems.

Accessory Power SocketsSunglasses HolderCoat Hook


entsand

Controls

99

COAT HOOK

０４／０８／０５　１０：５１：１５　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０１０２　

Turn on a spotlight by pushing thelens. Push the lens again to turn itoff. You can use the spotlights at alltimes.

After both doors are closed tightly,the light dims slightly, then fades outin about 30 seconds.

The ceiling light (with the switch inthe center position) comes on whenyou remove the key from the ignitionswitch. If you do not open a door, thelight stays on, then fades out inabout 30 seconds.

If you leave either door open withoutthe key in the ignition switch, theceiling light will go off after 3minutes.The ceiling light has a three-position

switch; ON, Door Activated, andOFF. In the Door Activated (center)position, the light comes on whenyou:

Open either door.

Unlock the doors with the key orremote transmitter.

Interior Lights

SpotlightsCeiling Light

100

LX and LX-V6 models

OFF

DOOR ACTIVATED

ON

０４／０８／０５　１０：５１：２６　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０１０３　

The courtesy light between thespotlights comes on when you turnthe parking lights on. To adjust itsbrightness, turn the Select/Resetknob on the instrument panel.

The courtesy light in each doorcomes on when the door is opened,and goes out when the door is closed.

Your vehicle also has a courtesy lightin the ignition switch. This lightcomes on when you open the driver’sdoor. It fades out in about 30seconds after the door is closed.

The spotlights have a two-positionswitch. In the DOOR position, thelights come on when you open eitherdoor. In the OFF position, the lightsdo not come on.

The spotlights (with the switch inthe DOOR position) also come onwhen you unlock the door with thekey or the remote transmitter, andwhen you remove the key from theignition switch.

On EX and EX-V6 models

On EX and EX-V6 models

Interior Lights

Courtesy Lights

Instruments

andC

ontrols

101

IGNITION SWITCH LIGHT

DOOR LIGHT COURTESY LIGHT

EX and EX-V6 models

DOORACTIVATED

OFF

０４／０８／０５　１０：５１：３７　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０１０４　

102

０４／０８／０５　１０：５１：４０　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０１０５　

The standard audio system hasmany features. This section de-scribes those features and how touse them.

The heating and air conditioningsystems in your vehicle provide acomfortable driving environment inall weather conditions.

Your vehicle has an anti-theft audiosystem that requires a code numberto enable it.

The security system helps to dis-courage vandalism and theft of yourvehicle.

Navigation systems are available onU.S. models only.

............Vents, Heating, and A/C . 104..........................Using the A/C . 109

.....Automatic Climate Control . 111.........Dual Temperature Control . 113

.............Climate Control Sensors . 115.........Playing the AM/FM Radio . 116

...........AM/FM Radio Reception . 122Playing the XM Satellite

.........................................Radio . 124.................................Playing a CD . 130

...................Protecting Your CDs . 138........CD Player Error Messages . 139

....CD Changer Error Messages . 140..............................Playing a Tape . 142

...............Remote Audio Controls . 148................Radio Theft Protection . 149

.........................Setting the Clock . 150...........................Security System . 151

..............................Cruise Control . 152HomeLink Universal

...............................Transceiver . 155

On all models except the 4-cylinder LX

FeaturesF

eatures

103

０４／０８／０５　１０：５１：４６　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０１０６　

Vents, Heating, and A/C

104

TEMPERATURECONTROL DIAL

AIR CONDITIONING(A/C) BUTTON

MODE BUTTONS

TEMPERATURE DISPLAY

REAR WINDOWDEFOGGERBUTTON

AIR CONDITIONING(A/C) BUTTON

DEFROSTBUTTON

RECIRCULATION BUTTON

OFF BUTTON

DUALBUTTON

AUTOBUTTON

FAN CONTROLBUTTONS

MODEBUTTON

FAN CONTROL DIAL

REAR WINDOWDEFOGGERBUTTON

RECIRCULATION BUTTON

LX, EX, and LX-V6 models

DRIVER’S SIDETEMPERATURECONTROL DIAL

PASSENGER’S SIDETEMPERATURECONTROL DIAL

Without navigation system4-cylinder EX with Leather model and EX-V6 models

０４／０８／０５　１０：５１：５５　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０１０７　

Vents, Heating, and A/CF

eatures

105

DRIVER’S SIDETEMPERATURE DISPLAY

PASSENGER’S SIDETEMPERATURE DISPLAY

DEFROSTBUTTON

RECIRCULATIONBUTTON

TEMPERATURE DISPLAY

FAN CONTROLICONS

REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER BUTTON

OFFBUTTON

DRIVER’SSIDETEMPERATURECONTROLBUTTONSAUTO

BUTTON

MODE ICONS

A/C BUTTON

AIR CONDITIONING(A/C) ICONS

PASSENGER’S SIDETEMPERATURECONTROL BUTTONS

DUAL BUTTON

With navigation system (U.S. vehicles only)4-cylinder EX with Leather model and EX-V6 models

０４／０８／０５　１０：５２：０２　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０１０８　

▲ ▼

When the indicator in the DUALbutton is off, both sides adjust to thesame temperature.

Press the DUAL button to selectdual temperature control mode (seepage ).

This button turns the airconditioning on and off. Theindicator above the button is onwhen the A/C is on.

On EX with Leather and EX-V6models, see page for automaticclimate control and semi-automaticoperation information.

Select the fan speed by pressing theA/C button to view the display, thenpress any of the fan control icons.

Turning this dial clockwise increasesthe temperature of the airflow.

The driver and passenger can selectindependent temperature settings.

Press the DUAL button. Theindicator in the button will come on.The driver and passenger can eachselect the temperature controlbuttons ( or ) to thedesired setting.

Turn this dial to increase or decreasethe fan speed and airflow.

Select the fan speed by pressing thefan control buttons ( or ).The fan speed is shown by verticalbars in the display. Push the DUAL button. When the

indicator in the button is on, turn thedials to adjust the temperature.

113

111

Vehicles without navigation system

Vehicles with navigation system



On all models except EX with Leatherand EX-V6 models

On EX with Leather and EX-V6 models






Dual Button

Air Conditioning (A/C) Button/Icons

Temperature ControlFan Control

106

０４／０８／０５　１０：５２：１９　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０１０９　

Press the A/C button to turn the airconditioning on and off. You will seeA/C ON or A/C OFF in the display.

The outside air intakes for theheating and cooling system are atthe base of the windshield. Keep thisarea clear of leaves and other debris.

The system should be left in freshair mode under almost all conditions.Keeping the system in recirculationmode, particularly with the A/C off,can cause the windows to fog up.

Switch to recirculation mode whendriving through dusty or smokyconditions, then return to fresh airmode.

This button turns the rear windowdefogger off and on (see page ).

Use the mode control buttons oricons to select the vents the air flowsfrom. Some air will flow from thedashboard corner vents in all modes.

Each time you press the MODEbutton, the display shows the modeselected.

Press the A/C button to view thedisplay, then touch any of the modeicons on the display.

Press the A/C button to view thedisplay. Touching ON or OFF in thedisplay turns the air conditioning onand off. You will see A/C ON or A/COFF in the display.

When you turn the A/C off, thesystem cannot regulate the insidetemperature if you set thetemperature control buttons belowthe outside temperature.

When the recirculation indicator ison, air from the vehicle’s interior issent throughout the system again.When the indicator is off, air isbrought in from the outside of thevehicle (fresh air mode).

71

CONTINUED

Vehicles without Navigation System








Recirculation Button Rear Window Defogger Button

Mode Control

Features

107

０４／０８／０５　１０：５２：３６　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０１１０　

Air flows from the centerand corner vents in the dashboard.

Air flows from the floorvents.

Air flows from the defrostervents at the base of the windshield.

Airflow is divided betweenthe vents in the dashboard and thefloor vents.

Airflow is divided betweenthe floor vents and the defrostervents at the base of the windshield.

The heater uses engine coolant towarm the air. If the engine is cold, itwill be several minutes before youfeel warm air coming through thesystem.

When you select or ,the system automatically switches tofresh air mode and turns on the A/C.In this case you cannot turn the A/Coff.

When you select , the systemautomatically switches to fresh airmode.

Set the temperature to the lowerlimit.Make sure the A/C is off.Select and fresh air mode.Set the fan to the desired speed.

Select .When you select , the systemautomatically switches to the freshair mode.Set the fan to the desired speed.Adjust the warmth of the air withthe temperature control dial.The flow-through ventilation system

draws in outside air, circulates itthrough the interior, then exhausts itthrough vents near the rear window.

You can set the temperatures for thedriver’s side and the passenger’s sideseparately when this button ispressed (indicator on). When theindicator in the DUAL button is off,you can adjust both sides to thesame temperature with the driver’sside temperature control dial orbuttons.

The system automaticallyturns on the A/C and switches torecirculation mode. Air flows fromthe center and side vents in thedashboard.

1.

1.

2.3.4.

2.3.

All models except EX with Leather andEX-V6 with navigation system

All models except EX with Leather andEX-V6


MAX A/C Button

Using the Heater

Ventilation

Dual Button

108

０４／０８／０５　１０：５２：５５　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０１１１　

▲ ▼

CONTINUED

Air conditioning places an extra loadon the engine. Watch the enginecoolant temperature gauge (see page

). If it moves near the red zone,turn off the A/C until the gaugereads normally.

Press the A/C button, and themanual A/C screen appears.Select the desired mode and thefan speed icons appear on thedisplay.Adjust the warmth with thetemperature buttons ( or ).

Turn on the A/C by pressing thebutton. The indicator above thebutton comes on when a fan speedis selected. The display showsA/C ON.Make sure the temperature is setto maximum cool.Select .If the outside air is humid, selectRecirculation mode. If the outsideair is dry, select fresh air mode.Set the fan to the desired speed.

Press the A/C button, and themanual A/C screen appears.Select the ON icon on the display.Select the desired temperatureand MODE selections. If theoutside air is humid, selectrecirculation mode. If the outsideair is dry, select fresh air mode.

you cancool it down more rapidly by partiallyopening the windows, turning on theA/C, and setting the fan tomaximum speed in fresh air mode.

1.1.

2.

3.

2.3.

1.

2.

3.4.

5.

65

If the interior is very warm,

All models except EX with Leather andEX-V6 with navigation system

On EX with Leather and EX-V6 modelswith navigation system

On EX with Leather and EX-V6 modelswith navigation system


Using the A/C

Features

109

０４／０８／０５　１０：５３：０６　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０１１２　

Air conditioning, as it cools, removesmoisture from the air. When used incombination with the heater, itmakes the interior warm and dry.

Once the engine is warmed up, thissetting is suitable for all drivingconditions.

To remove fog from the inside of thewindows:

When you switch to another modefrom , the A/C stays on.Press the A/C button to turn it off.

Turn the fan on.Turn on the air conditioning.Select and fresh air mode.Adjust the temperature to yourpreference.

Set the fan to the desired speed, orhigh for faster defrosting.Select . The systemautomatically switches to fresh airmode and turns on the A/C. TheA/C indicator will not come on if itwas off to start with.Adjust the temperature so theairflow feels warm.Select to help clear therear window.To increase airflow to thewindshield, close the corner vents.

To cool the interior with MAX A/C:Set the fan to the desired speed.Select the MAX A/C mode. Thesystem automatically turns on theA/C, selects and switchesto recirculation mode.Make sure the temperature is setto maximum cool.

1.

1.

2.

3.2.3.4.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

On all models except EX with Leatherand EX-V6


Dehumidify the Interior To Defog and Defrost

110

０４／０８／０５　１０：５３：２０　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０１１３　

▲▼

In the AUTO mode, the vehicle’sinterior temperature isindependently regulated for thedriver and passenger. If the driver’sside of the vehicle is getting toomuch sun, the system will adjust to alower temperature.

Select . The systemautomatically switches to fresh airmode and turns on the A/C. TheA/C indicator will not come on if itwas off to start with.Select .Set the fan and temperaturecontrols to maximum level.

The automatic climate controlsystem adjusts the fan speed andairflow levels to maintain the interiortemperature you select.

Press the Auto button. Withnavigation system, the indicator inthe button comes on.

To clear the windows faster, you canclose the dashboard corner vents byrotating the wheel below each vent.This sends more warm air to thewindshield defroster vents. Once thewindshield is clear, select fresh airmode to avoid fogging the windows.

For your safety, make sure you havea clear view through all the windowsbefore driving.

Set the desired temperature bypressing the to raise thetemperature or the to lower thetemperature. The selectedtemperature will show in the upperdisplay.

Set the desired temperature byturning the temperature controldial. You will see AUTO in thesystem’s display.

1.

1.

2.3.

2.

CONTINUED

With navigation system

Without navigation system


EX with Leather and EX-V6 models withnavigation system


To Remove Exterior Frost or IceFrom the Windows

Automatic Climate Control

Features

111

０４／０８／０５　１０：５３：３４　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０１１４　

－

In cold weather, the fan will notcome on automatically until theheater starts to develop warm air.

Making any manual selection causesthe word AUTO in the display to goout.

The system automatically selects theproper mix of conditioned and/orheated air that will, as quickly aspossible, raise or lower the interiortemperature to your preference.

You can manually select variousfunctions of the climate controlsystem when it is in fully automaticmode. All other features remainautomatically controlled.

If you press the A/C button next tothe display, the manual selectionswill show in the display. Making anymanual selection causes theindicator in the AUTO button to turnoff.

When you set the temperature to itslower limit ( ) or its upper limit( ), the system runs at fullcooling or heating only. It does notregulate the interior temperature.

Whenthe indicator in the dual button is on,the driver’s side and passenger’s sidetemperature can be controlledindependently (see page ). When the climate control system is

turned OFF, the temperature in theupper display will also turn off.

To keep stale air and mustinessfrom collecting, you should havethe fan running at all times.

Keep the system completely offfor short periods only.

Turning the fan speed andtemperature control dials all the wayto the left shuts off the systemcompletely.

If you press OFF, the climate controlsystem shuts off completely.

113




On EX with Leather and EX-V6 models Except EX with Leather and EX-V6models



To Turn Everything OffSemi-automatic Operation

Dual Temperature Control

112

０４／０８／０５　１０：５３：４９　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０１１５　

Your vehicle has two temperaturecontrol dials, one for the driver, andone for the passenger.

Your vehicle has four temperaturecontrol buttons, two for the driver,and two for the passenger.

The driver’s side and the passenger’sside can be controlled independentlyby adjusting these dials or buttonswhen the indicator in the DUALbutton is lit.

CONTINUED




Dual Temperature ControlF

eatures

113

DUAL BUTTON

DUAL BUTTON

DRIVER’S SIDETEMPERATURECONTROL BUTTONS

PASSENGER’S SIDETEMPERATURECONTROL BUTTONS

DRIVER’S SIDETEMPERATURECONTROL DIAL

PASSENGER’S SIDETEMPERATURECONTROL DIAL



０４／０８／０５　１０：５３：５７　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０１１６　

▲ ▼

▲ ▼

When you set the temperature to itslower limit or its upper limit, it will bedisplayed as or .

To set the driver’s side temperatureto a different value than thepassenger’s, press the DUAL button,then turn the driver’s control dial orpress the or buttons on thedriver’s side. To set the passenger’sside to a different value than thedriver’s, turn the passenger’s controldial or press the or buttons onthe passenger’s side. You can adjustthe passenger’s side withoutpressing the DUAL button first.

Push AUTO or . The selectedtemperatures appears in the display(in the upper display with thenavigation system). When theindicator in the DUAL button is off,you can adjust both sides to thesame temperature by adjusting thedriver’s side temperature control dialor buttons.

Dual Temperature Control

Temperature Control Dials/Buttons

114

DRIVER’S SIDE PASSENGER’S SIDE

０４／０８／０５　１０：５４：０５　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０１１７　

The climate control system has twosensors. A sunlight sensor is in thetop of the dashboard, and atemperature sensor is next to thesteering column. Do not cover thesensors or spill any liquid on them.

Climate Control Sensors

Sunlight and TemperatureSensors

Features

115

SUNLIGHT SENSOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR

０４／０８／０５　１０：５４：１１　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０１１８　

Playing the AM/FM Radio

116

PWR/VOL KNOB

SEEK BAR

STEREO INDICATOR

SEEK BAR

AM/FMBUTTON

SCANBUTTON

TUNE BAR

PRESETBARS

TUNE BAR

PRESETBARS

SOUND BUTTONSCAN BUTTON

AM/FM BUTTON

STEREO INDICATOR

PWR/VOL KNOB

SOUND BUTTON

LX model EX and LX-V6 models

AUTO SELECTBUTTON

AUTOSELECTBUTTON

０４／０８／０５　１０：５４：１９　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０１１９　

CONTINUED

Playing the AM/FM RadioF

eatures

117

PWR/VOL KNOB

STEREO INDICATOR

SEEK BAR

TUNE BAR

PRESETBARS

TUNE BAR

PRESETBARS

SOUND BUTTONSCAN BUTTON

PWR/VOL KNOB

SOUND BUTTON

AM/FM BUTTON

SCAN BUTTON

AM/FMBUTTON

STEREOINDICATOR

SEEKBAR

AUTOSELECTBUTTON

AUTOSELECTBUTTON

EX with Leather and EX-V6 models(Canada only)

EX with Leather and EX-V6 modelswithout navigation system(U.S. only)

０４／０８／０５　１０：５４：２６　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０１２０　


118

AM/FM BUTTON

PWR/VOL KNOB

SEEK BAR

UPPER DISPLAY

AUDIO DISPLAY BUTTON

TUNE/SOUND KNOB

SOUND ICONAUDIO SELECT ICON

SCAN BUTTON

STEREO INDICATOR

SCANICON

PRESET ICONS

EX with Leather and EX-V6 modelswith navigation system (U.S. only)

０４／０８／０５　１０：５４：３２　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０１２１　

－

－

－

The ignition switch must be in theACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.Turn the system on by pushing thePWR/VOL knob or the AM/FMbutton. Adjust the volume by turningthe PWR/VOL knob.

Pushing the AUDIO DISPLAYbutton will also turn on the system.

The band and frequency that theradio was last tuned to is displayed.To change bands, press the AM/FMbutton. On the FM band, ST will bedisplayed if the station is broadcast-ing in stereo. Stereo reproduction onAM is not available.

XM Satellite Radio information isavailable on page .

You can use any of five methods tofind radio stations on the selectedband: , , , thepreset bars/icons, and

.

The scan function samplesall stations with strong signals on theselected band. To activate it, pressthe SCAN button, then release it, ortouch the SCAN icon (models withnavigation system). You will seeSCAN in the display. The system willscan for a station with a strong signal.When it finds one, it will stop andplay that station for about 5 seconds.

Use the TUNE bar orknob to tune the radio to a desiredfrequency. Press the side of thebar or turn the knob right to tune toa higher frequency, and press the

side or turn the knob left totune to a lower frequency.

The SEEK functionsearches up and down from thecurrent frequency to find a stationwith a strong signal. To activate it,press the or side of thebar, then release it.

If you do nothing, the system willscan for the next strong station andplay it for 5 seconds. When it plays astation you want to listen to, pressthe SCAN button or touch the SCANicon again.

124

CONTINUED

On models with navigation system

To Select a Station

TUNE SEEK SCANAUTO

SELECT

SCAN

TUNE

SEEK

To Play the AM/FM Radio


eatures

119

０４／０８／０５　１０：５４：４５　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０１２２　

－－

－

－

Each side of the bars (16) or preset icon can store onefrequency on AM, and twofrequencies on FM.

Select the desired band, AM orFM. FM1 and FM2 let you storetwo frequencies with each side ofthe preset bar or each preset icon.

Press the SOUND button repeatedlyto display the bass (BAS), treble(TRE), balance (BAL), and fader(FAD) settings. On models withnavigation system, touch theSOUND icon or press the TUNEknob.

press theA.SEL button or touch the AUTOSELECT icon. This restores thepresets you originally set.

If you do not like the stations autoselect has stored, you can storeother frequencies on the preset barsor icons as previously described.

You will see a ‘‘0’’ displayed afterpressing a preset bar or icon if autoselect cannot find a strong station forevery preset bar or icon.

Repeat steps 1 through 3 to store atotal of six stations on AM andtwelve stations on FM.

The preset frequencies will be lost ifyour vehicle’s battery goes dead, isdisconnected, or the radio fuse isremoved.

If you aretraveling far from home and can nolonger receive your preset stations,you can use the auto select feature tofind stations in the local area.

Press the A. SEL button or touch theAUTO SELECT icon. ‘‘A. SEL’’flashes in the display (the upperdisplay on models with navigationsystem), and the system goes intoscan mode for several seconds. Itstores the frequencies of six AM,and twelve FM stations in the presetbars or icons.

Pick a preset number (1 6), andhold it until you hear a beep.Press the left or right side of thebar or icon and hold it until youhear a beep.

Use the TUNE, SEEK, or SCANfunction to tune the radio to adesired station.

First push the AUDIO DISPLAYbutton to view the preset icons.

1.

2.

3.

4.

To turn off auto select,On models without navigation system

Preset

Adjusting the Sound

AUTO SELECT


120

０４／０８／０５　１０：５４：５９　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０１２３　

－

－

－

－

If you want to adjust the sound whilethe radio/CD is playing, push theAUDIO DISPLAY button, then touchthe SOUND icon in the display.

Touch the arrows next to the BAS orTRE icons. The adjustment showsyou the current setting. Touch theleft or right bars on the sound grid.Balance is equalized when thevertical lines are centered on thegrid. Touch the front or rear bars onthe sound grid. The fader isequalized when the horizontal linesare centered on the grid.

Adjusts the balance, or side-to-side strength of the sound.

The system will return to the audiodisplay about 5 seconds after youstop adjusting a mode. On modelswith navigation system, touch theRETURN icon to go back to theaudio screen.

Each mode is shown in the display asit changes. Turn the PWR/VOLknob to adjust the setting to yourliking. When the level reaches thecenter, you will see a ‘‘ ’’ in thedisplay.

Adjusts the bass.

Adjusts the treble.

Adjusts the fader, or thefront-to-back strength of the sound.



On models without navigation system

BAL

BAS

TRE

FAD


eatures

121

FADER ADJUST ICONS SOUND GRID

RETURN ICON

BALANCEADJUST ICONS

BASS ADJUST ICONS

TREBLE ADJUST ICONS


０４／０８／０５　１０：５５：１２　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０１２４　

The radio can receive the completeAM and FM bands.Those bands cover these frequen-cies:

AM band: 530 to 1,710 kilohertzFM band: 87.7 to 107.9 megahertz

How well the radio receives stationsis dependent on many factors, suchas the distance from the station’stransmitter, nearby large objects,and atmospheric conditions.

Driving very near the transmitter ofa station that is broadcasting on afrequency close to the frequency ofthe station you are listening to canalso affect your radio’s reception.You may temporarily hear bothstations, or hear only the station youare close to.

Radio stations on the AM band areassigned frequencies at least tenkilohertz apart (530, 540, 550).Stations on the FM band areassigned frequencies at least 0.2megahertz apart (87.9, 88.1, 88.3).

Stations must use these exactfrequencies. It is fairly common forstations to round-off the frequency intheir advertising, so your radio coulddisplay a frequency of 100.9 eventhough the announcer may identifythe station as ‘‘FM101.’’

A radio station’s signal gets weakeras you get farther away from itstransmitter. If you are listening to anAM station, you will notice the soundvolume becoming weaker and thestation drifting in and out. If you arelistening to an FM station, you willsee the stereo indicator flickering offand on as the signal weakens.Eventually, the stereo indicator willgo off and the sound will fadecompletely as you get out of range ofthe station’s signal.

Radio ReceptionAM/FM Radio Frequencies

AM/FM Radio Reception

122

０４／０８／０５　１０：５５：２３　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０１２５　

Radio signals, especially on the FMband, are deflected by large objectssuch as buildings and hills. Yourradio then receives both the directsignal from the station’s transmitter,and the deflected signal. This causesthe sound to distort or flutter. This isa main cause of poor radio receptionin city driving.

Radio reception can be affected byatmospheric conditions such asthunderstorms, high humidity, andeven sunspots. You may be able toreceive a distant radio station oneday and not receive it the next daybecause of a change in conditions.

Electrical interference from passingvehicles and stationary sources cancause temporary reception problems.

As required by the FCC:Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user’sauthority to operate the equipment.

AM/FM Radio ReceptionF

eatures

123

０４／０８／０５　１０：５５：３０　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０１２６　

Playing the XM Satellite Radio

124

PWR/VOL KNOB

TUNE BAR

PWR/VOL KNOB

SCAN BUTTON PRESET BARS

CATEGORY/CHANNEL MODE INDICATOR

MODE ICON

SCAN ICON

PRESET ICONS

AUDIO DISPLAYBUTTON

SEEK/SKIPBAR

SCANBUTTON

CATEGORY/CHANNELMODE INDICATOR

SEEK/SKIPBAR

TUNE KNOB

CH/DISC BAR


SATELLITERADIOBUTTON

SATELLITERADIOBUTTON

DISPLAYBUTTON


U.S. EX with Leather and EX-V6 models

０４／０８／０５　１０：５５：３９　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０１２７　

－

CONTINUED

The ignition must be in theACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.Turn the system on:

When in the satellite radio mode,you can use any of three methods tofind channels: TUNE, SEEK/SKIP(CATEGORY), and SCAN.

Turn the TUNE knob to changechannels. Turn the knob right forhigher numbered channels and leftfor lower numbered channels.

Press the TUNE bar to changechannel selections. Press forhigher numbered channels and

for lower numbered channels.

Push any of the following: PWR/VOL knob, the CD/AUX (XM), orAUDIO button.

Push any of the following: PWR/VOL knob or the CD/AUX (XM)button.

Turn the PWR/VOL knob to adjustthe volume.

Satellite radio is available in U.S.models only.

XM is a registered trademark ofXM Satellite Radio, Inc.

Your vehicle is capable of receivingXM Satellite Radio anywhere in theUnited States except Hawaii andAlaska. It is not available in Canada.





Satellite Digital Radio To Select a Channel

TUNE

To Play XM Satellite Radio

Playing the XM Satellite RadioF

eatures

U.S. EX with Leather and EX-V6models

125

０４／０８／０５　１０：５５：５６　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０１２８　

－

－

－

－

Theseek/skip function selects thevarious categories in XM, such asJazz/Blues, Rock, Classical, etc.Push the to change thecategory forward. Push the tochange the category backward. Tosearch for channels within acategory, turn the TUNE knobclockwise or press the TUNE bar

.

Press and release thisbutton to change the display. Thedisplay will change in the followingsequence: channel name, channelnumber, category, artist name, andmusic title.

The scan function samplesall channels for 5 seconds. Toactivate the function, push the SCANbutton. Push it again to get out of thesequence.

Each preset icon or eachside of the preset bar can store onechannel in XM1 and one in XM2.

Push the SAT button, you will seeXM1 or XM2.

Use the TUNE, SEEK or SCANfunction to tune the radio to adesired channel.

Pick a preset icon or number andhold it until you hear a beep.

Once your XM channels are preset,pressing either side of the CH/DISCbar will select your preset channels.

Repeat steps 1 through 3 to store atotal of six stations on XM1 andsix on XM2.

1.

2.

3.

4.


Vehicles with navigation systemSEEK/SKIP (CATEGORY)

DISP

SCAN

Preset


126

０４／０８／０５　１０：５６：０７　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０１２９　

Satellite radio receives signals fromtwo satellites to produce clear, high-quality digital reception. It offersmany channels in several categories.Along with a large selection ofdifferent types of music, satelliteradio also allows you to view channeland category selections in the audiodisplay.

The XM satellites are in orbit overthe equator; therefore, objects southof the vehicle may cause satellitereception interruptions. To helpcompensate for this, ground-basedrepeaters are placed in majormetropolitan areas.

Satellite signals are more likely to beblocked by tall buildings andmountains the farther north youtravel from the equator.

CONTINUED

Satellite Radio Signals


eatures

127

Signal may beblocked bymountains orlarge obstaclesto the south.

SATELLITE

GROUNDREPEATER

Signal is weaker inthese areas.

０４／０８／０５　１０：５６：１５　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０１３０　

Depending on where you drive, youmay experience reception problems.Interference can be caused by any ofthese conditions:

Driving on the south side of aneast/west mountain roadDriving on the north side of alarge commercial truck on aneast/west roadDriving in the tunnelsDriving on a road beside a verticalwall, steep cliff, or hill to the southof youDriving on the lower level of amulti-tiered roadDriving on a single lane roadalongside dense trees taller than50 ft. (15 m) to the south of you

There may also be other geographicsituations that could affect satelliteradio reception.

If your XM Radio service has expiredor you purchased your vehicle froma previous owner, you can listen to asampling of the broadcasts availableon XM Satellite Radio. With theignition switch in the ACCESSORY(I) or ON (II) position, push thePWR/VOL knob to turn on the audiosystem, and press the CD/AUX(XM) button. A variety of musictypes and styles will play.

As required by the FCC:Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user’sauthority to operate the equipment.

Receiving Satellite Radio Service


128

０４／０８／０５　１０：５６：２５　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０１３１　

If you decide to purchase XMSatellite Radio service, contact XMRadio at , or at1-800-852-9696. You will need to givethem your radio I.D. number andyour credit card number.To get your radio I.D. number:

Turn the TUNE knob or press theTUNE bar until ‘‘0’’ appears in thedisplay. Your I.D. will appear in thedisplay.

After you’ve registered with XMRadio, keep your audio system in theSatellite Radio mode while you waitfor activation. This should take about30 minutes.

While waiting for activation, makesure your vehicle remains in an openarea with good reception. Once youraudio system is activated, ‘‘category’’or ‘‘CH’’ will appear in the display,and you’ll be able to listen to XMRadio broadcasts. XM Radio willcontinue to send an activation signalto your vehicle for at least 12 hoursfrom the activation request. If theservice has not been activated after36 hours, contact XM Radio.

www.xmradio.com


eatures

129

０４／０８／０５　１０：５６：３２　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０１３２　

Playing a CD

130

PWR/VOL KNOBPWR/VOL KNOB

AM/FM BUTTON

CD SLOT

CD LOAD INDICATOR

CD BUTTON

CD SLOT

LOAD BUTTON EJECT BUTTON

EJECT BUTTON

TRACK NUMBER

CD BUTTON

SEEK/SKIPBAR

CD LOADINDICATOR

DISC AND TRACK NUMBERS

SEEK/SKIPBAR

LX model EX and LX-V6 models

REPEAT BUTTON

REPEAT BUTTON

RANDOMBUTTON

RANDOMBUTTON

０４／０８／０５　１０：５６：３９　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０１３３　

CONTINUED

Playing a CDF

eatures

131

PWR/VOL KNOB

CD SLOT

CD BUTTON

CD SLOTLOAD BUTTON

CD BUTTON

SEEK/SKIPBAR

SEEK/SKIPBAR

DISCNUMBER

CD LOAD INDICATOR

LOAD BUTTON

EJECTBUTTON

CD LOAD INDICATOR

EJECTBUTTON


TRACK NUMBER

PWR/VOL KNOB

REPEAT BUTTON

RANDOMBUTTON

REPEAT BUTTON

RANDOMBUTTON

EX with Leather and EX-V6 models(Canada only)


０４／０８／０５　１０：５６：４８　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０１３４　

Playing a CD

132

PWR/VOL KNOB

UPPER DISPLAY


CH/DISC BAR

CD SLOT

EJECT BUTTON

RANDOM ICONLOAD BUTTON

SCAN BUTTON

DISCSCANICON TRACK

SCAN ICON

SEEK/SKIP BAR

CDLOAD INDICATOR


CD/AUX/SATELLITERADIO BUTTON

TRACKREPEATICON

DISCREPEATICON


０４／０８／０５　１０：５６：５６　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０１３５　

To load or play CDs, the ignitionswitch must be in the ACCESSORY(I) or ON(II) position.You operate the CD player/CDchanger with the same controls usedfor the radio. To select the CDplayer/CD changer, press the CDbutton. The number of the trackplaying is shown in the display. Withthe in-dash CD changer, the disc andtrack numbers are displayed. Thesystem will continuously play a CDuntil you change modes.

Insert a CD into the CD slot. Thedrive will pull the CD in the rest ofthe way to play it. When the systemreaches the end of the disc, it willreturn to the beginning and play thedisc again.

To play the radio when a CD isplaying, press the AM/FM button.Press the CD button again to switchback to the CD player.

To play the tape when a CD isplaying, insert a tape in the player(optional). If a tape is in the player,press the AUX button. Press the CDbutton again to switch back to theCD player. The cassette player isoptional on all U.S. models.

You can also play 3-inch (8-cm) discswithout using an adapter ring.

To listen to satellite radio when a CDis playing, press the CD/AUX (XM)button.

If you turn the system off while a CDis playing, either with the PWR/VOLknob or by turning off the ignition,the disc will stay in the drive. Whenyou turn the system back on, the CDwill begin playing where it left off.

Your vehicle’s in-dash CD changerhold up to six discs.

The disc number/icon for anempty position is highlighted andthe red indicator starts blinking.

To load only one CD, press andrelease the LOAD button.

Press the LOAD button until youhear a beep and see ‘‘LOAd’’ in thedisplay (in the upper display onvehicles with navigation system).

1.

2.

CONTINUED

On models with Satellite Radio

LX model

Playing a CD

To Play a CD

Loading CDs in the In-dash CDChanger F

eatures

133

Do not use discs with adhesive labels.The label can curl up and cause thedisc to jam in the unit.

０４／０８／０５　１０：５７：１１　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０１３６　

－－

＋

▲ ▼

－

You can also load a CD into an emptyposition while a CD is playing bypressing the appropriate side of apreset bar or touching a disc icon.The system stops playing the currentCD and starts the loading sequence.It plays the CD just loaded.

Insert the disc into the CD slotwhen the green CD load indicatorcomes on. Insert it only abouthalfway; the drive will pull it in therest of the way. You will see‘‘BUSY’’ in the display as the CDload indicator turns red and blinksas the CD is loaded.

You cannot load and play 3-inch(8-cm) discs in this system.

Repeat this until all six positionsare loaded. If you are not loadingall six positions, the system beginsplaying the last CD loaded.

Do not try to insert a disc until‘‘LOAd’’ appears. You coulddamage the audio unit.

When the CD load indicator turnsgreen and ‘‘LOAd’’ appears in thescreen again, insert the next CD inthe slot.

To select a different disc, press theappropriate side of a preset bar(1 6) or use the Preset 5 (DISC )to select the previous disc or Preset6 (DISC ) to select the next disc insequence. On models with navigationsystem, touch the appropriate discicon or press the or side of theCH/DISC bar. If you select a loadedposition in the CD changer, the

system will try to load the CD in thenext available slot.

You operate the CD changer withthe same controls used for the radio.The numbers of the disc and trackplaying are shown in the display. Onmodels with navigation system,these numbers also appear in theupper display.

Each time youpress and release the side, theplayer skips forward to thebeginning of the next track. Pressand release the side, to skipbackward to the beginning of thecurrent track. Press it again to skipto the beginning of the previoustrack.

To move rapidly within a track, pressand hold the or side.

4.

5.

3.


Playing a CD

To Change or Select Tracks

SEEK/SKIP

134

０４／０８／０５　１０：５７：２３　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０１３７　

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

CONTINUED

When you touchthe TRACK RPT icon, the systemcontinuously plays the same track.You will see TRACK RPThighlighted on the audio screen andRPT in the upper display. Press theicon again to get out of track repeat.

When you touch theDISC SCAN icon on the audiodisplay, the system gives you a 10second sampling of the first track oneach disc in the in-dash CD changer.You will see DISC SCAN highlightedon the audio screen and D-SCAN inthe upper display. Touch the iconagain to get out of the system.

When you touchthis icon on the audio display orpress the SCAN button, you will get

a 10 second sampling of each trackon the current CD. You will seeTRACK SCAN highlighted on theaudio screen and SCAN in the upperdisplay. Press the icon or buttonagain to get out of the system.

To use the controls, press theAUDIO DISPLAY button, the controlicons will appear on the screen.

Press and release theRDM button to play the tracks inrandom order. You will see RDM inthe display. Press it again to returnto normal play.

To continuously replaya track, press and release the RPTbutton. You will see RPT in thedisplay. Press it again to turn it off.

To continuouslyreplay the current disc, press andhold the RPT button. You will seeD-RPT in the display. Press the RPTbutton again to turn it off.

The scan function samplesall the tracks on the selected disc inthe order they are recorded on theCD. To activate it, press and releasethe SCAN button. You will see SCANin the display. You will get a 10second sampling of each track on theselected CD. Press the SCAN buttonagain to get out of the system.

This function sampleseach first track of all the discs in thein-dash CD changer in the order theyare stored. To activate it, select theD-SCAN mode by pressing andholding the SCAN button. You willsee D-SCAN in the display. You willget a 10 second sampling of the firsttrack on each CD. Press the SCANbutton again to get out of the system.


Except for LX model

Except for LX model

Playing a CD

TRACK RPT

DISC SCAN

TRACK SCAN

RANDOM

REPEAT

D-REPEAT

SCAN

D-SCAN

Features

135

０４／０８／０５　１０：５７：３３　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０１３８　

－

－

－

－ ▲ ▼

When you touch theRANDOM icon on the audio display,the system plays the tracks on thecurrent CD in random order. Youwill see RANDOM highlighted onthe audio screen and RDM in theupper display. To turn this featureoff, touch RANDOM again or selecta different disc icon.

When you touch theDISC RPT icon on the audio display,the system continuously replays thecurrent CD. You will see DISC RPThighlighted on the audio screen andD-RPT in the upper display. Touchthe icon to turn the feature off.

Each time youpress and release the , theplayer skips forward to thebeginning of the next track. Pressand release the , to skipbackward to the beginning of thecurrent track. Press it twice to skipto the beginning of the previous

track.

To move rapidly within a track, pressand hold the or .

Press the or toselect an icon and play the disc.

Press the eject button ( ) toremove the CD. If you eject the CD,but do not remove it from the slot,the system will automatically reloadthe CD after 15 seconds and put it inpause mode. To begin playing, pressthe CD button.

Press the AM/FM button to switchto the AM/FM radio while a CD isplaying. To play the CD, press theCD button.

Press the AM/FM or CD/AUX(XM) button to switch to the AM/FM radio or satellite radio while aCD is playing. To play the CD, pressthe CD button again.

If a tape is in the optional tape player,press the AUX button to switch tothe tape while a CD is playing. Pressthe CD button again to switch backto the CD player.

If you turn the system off while a CDis playing, either with the PWR/VOLknob or by turning off the ignition,the disc will stay in the drive. Whenyou turn the system back on, the CDwill begin playing where it left off.

On LX model

Except EX with Leather and EX-V6models in the U.S.

On EX with Leather and EX-V6models in the U.S.

Playing a CD

RANDOM

DISC RPT

SEEK/SKIP

CH/DISC

To Stop Playing a CD

136

０４／０８／０５　１０：５７：４５　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０１３９　

－＋

－＋

To select the CD changer, press theCD button. The disc and tracknumbers will be displayed. To selecta different disc, use the preset 5(DISC ) side or preset 6 (DISC )side of the preset bar. To select theprevious disc, press the preset 5(DISC ), or preset 6 (DISC ) toselect the next disc in sequence.

If you select an empty slot in themagazine, the changer will searchfor the next available CD to load andplay.

On LX model, if there are no CDs inthe changer, the display will flash,and you will have to select anothermode.

You can also eject discs when theignition switch is off. The disc thatwas last selected is ejected first.

To remove the disc currently in play,press the eject ( ) button. Whena disc is removed from a slot, thesystem automatically begins the loadsequence so you can load anotherCD in that position. If you do notremove the disc from the changerwithin 15 seconds, the systemreturns to the previous mode (AM/FM or satellite radio). The disc willreload into the system and willremain there in a pause mode.

To remove a different CD from thechanger, first select it with theappropriate preset bar, or theappropriate icon or the CH/DISC bar.When that CD begins playing, pressthe eject button. Continue pressingthe eject button to remove all thediscs from the changer.

An optional six or eight disc CDchanger is available for your vehiclefrom your dealer.

This disc changer uses the samecontrols used for the in-dash CDplayer/changer or the radio.

Load the desired CDs in themagazine, and load the magazine inthe changer according to theinstructions that came with the unit.

Except for LX model

Playing a CD

Operating the Optional CDChanger

Removing CD’s from the In-dashCD Changer

Features

137

０４／０８／０５　１０：５７：５６　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０１４０　

When using CD-R discs, use onlyhigh quality CDs labeled for audiouse.

CD-RW discs will not work in thisunit.

Play only standard round CDs.Odd-shaped CDs may jam in thedrive or cause other problems.

Handle your CDs properly toprevent damage and skipping.

A new CD may be rough on theinner and outer edges. The smallplastic pieces causing this roughnesscan flake off and fall on the re-cording surface of the CD, causingskipping or other problems. Removethese pieces by rubbing the innerand outer edges with the side of apencil or pen.

To clean a CD, use a clean soft cloth.Wipe across the CD from the centerto the outside edge.

When a CD is not being played, storeit in its case to protect it from dustand other contamination. To preventwarpage, keep CDs out of directsunlight and extreme heat.

Handle a CD by its edges; nevertouch either surface. Do not placestabilizer rings or labels on the CD.These, along with contaminationfrom fingerprints, liquids, and felt-tippens, can cause the CD to not playproperly, or possibly jam in the drive.

When recording a CD-R, therecording must be closed for it tobe used by the system.

Never try to insert foreign objects inthe CD player/CD changer or themagazine.

Protecting Your CDs

General Information Protecting CDs

138

Do not use discs with adhesive labels.The label can curl up and cause thedisc to jam in the unit.

０４／０８／０５　１０：５８：０９　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０１４１　

Error Message Cause Solution

FOCUS Error

Mechanical Error

High Temperature

Press the eject button, and pull out the CD.Check if it is inserted correctly in the CD player.Make sure the CD is not scratched or damaged.Press the eject button, and pull out the CD.Check the CD for damage or deformation.If the CD cannot be pulled out, or the errormessage does not disappear after the CD isejected, see your dealer.Will disappear when the temperature returns tonormal.

If you see an error message in thedisplay while playing a CD, find thecause in the chart to the right. If youcannot clear the error message, takethe vehicle to your dealer.

CD Player Error Messages

On LX model

Features

139

０４／０８／０５　１０：５８：２０　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０１４２　

If you see an error message in thedisplay while operating the CDchanger, find the cause in thefollowing charts. If you cannot clearthe error message, take the vehicleto your dealer.


FOCUS Error

Mechanical Error

No CD in the CDchangerHigh Temperature

Press the CD eject button, and pull out the CDs.Check for an error message, and insert the CDsagain. If the message does not disappear or theCDs cannot be pulled out, see your dealer.Press the CD eject button, and pull out the CDs.Check for an error message, and insert the CDsagain. If the message does not disappear, or theCDs cannot be pulled out, see your dealer.Insert CDs.

Will disappear when the temperature returns tonormal.

::

Without navigation systemWith navigation system

CD Changer Error Messages

Except for LX model

140

０４／０８／０５　１０：５８：３０　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０１４３　


FOCUS Error

No CD in the CDmagazine

Mechanical Error

High Temperature

No CD magazine in theCD changer

Press the magazine eject button, pull themagazine out, and check for an error message.Insert the magazine again. If the message doesnot disappear, or the magazine cannot be pulledout, see your dealer.Insert CD.

Press the magazine eject button, pull themagazine out, and check for an error message.Insert the magazine again. If the message doesnot disappear, or the magazine cannot be pulledout, see your dealer.Will disappear when the temperature returns tonormal.Insert CD magazine.

CD Changer Error Messages

Optional CD Changer for LX model

Features

141

０４／０８／０５　１０：５８：３９　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０１４４　

Playing a Tape (Optional)

142

AM/FM BUTTON AM/FMBUTTON

PRESET BARS

CD/AUXBUTTON

TAPE DIRECTION INDICATOR

SEEK/SKIP BAR

PWR/VOL KNOB

TAPE DIRECTIONINDICATOR

CD/AUXBUTTON

SEEK/SKIP BAR

PRESET BARS

PWR/VOL KNOB

EX and LX-V6 modelsLX model

REPEATBUTTON

REPEATINDICATOR

DOLBYINDICATOR

DOLBY INDICATOR

REPEATBUTTON

REPEATINDICATOR

０４／０８／０５　１０：５８：４７　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０１４５　

CONTINUED

Playing a Tape (Optional)F

eatures

143

AM/FMBUTTON

PRESET BARS

CD/AUXBUTTON

SEEK/SKIP BAR

PWR/VOL KNOB

CD/AUXBUTTON

SEEK/SKIP BAR

PRESET BARS

PWR/VOL KNOB

AM/FMBUTTON

TAPE DIRECTIONINDICATOR TAPE DIRECTION

INDICATOR

DOLBY INDICATOR

REPEATINDICATOR

REPEATBUTTON

REPEAT INDICATOR

REPEATBUTTON

EX with Leather and EX-V6 modelswithout navigation system and satellite radio(Canada only)


０４／０８／０５　１０：５８：５７　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０１４６　


144

PWR/VOL KNOB


TUNE/SOUND KNOB

UPPER DISPLAY

CD/DISC BAR

FF ICON

REW ICON

SEEK/SKIP BAR

TAPE DIRECTION INDICATOR

PLAY/PROG ICON

NOISE REDUCTION (NR) ICON

REPEAT INDICATOR

CD/AUX (XM)BUTTON

REPEAT ICON


０４／０８／０５　１０：５９：０３　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０１４７　

▲

＊

＊

The ignition switch must be in theACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.Make sure the open side of the tapeis facing right, then insert the tapemost of the way into the slot. Thesystem will pull the tape in the restof the way, and begin to play it.

The tape direction indicator comeson to show you which side of thetape is playing. The indicates theside you inserted upward is nowplaying. If you want to play the otherside, press the preset 3 (PLAY/PROG) side of the preset bar ortouch the PLAY/PROG icon onmodels with navigation system.When the player reaches the end ofthe tape, it will automatically reversedirection and play the other side.

On models with navigation system,first push the AUDIO DISPLAYbutton before selecting any of theaudio icons on the audio screen.

Dolby noise reduction turns onwhen you insert a tape. The

indicator will light in thedisplay. If the tape was not recordedin Dolby, turn it off by pressing thepreset 4 (NR) side of the preset baror touching the NR icon. Dolbyremains off until you press thepreset bar or the icon again.

To remove the tape, press the ejectbutton on the tape player. If youwant to turn the player off, press thePWR/VOL knob or turn off theignition. The tape will remain in thedrive. When you turn the systemback on, the tape will be in pausemode. Press the preset 3 (PLAY/PROG) side of the preset bar ortouch the PLAY/PROG icon onmodels with navigation system.

To switch to the AM/FM radio,Satellite Radio (U.S. models), CDplayer, or CD changer while a tape isplaying, press the AM/FM or CD/AUX button [CD/AUX (XM) buttonon models with navigation system].To change back to the tape player,push the CD/AUX or CD/AUX(XM) button.

Dolby noise reduction is manufactured underlicense from Dolby Laboratories LicensingCorporation. ‘‘DOLBY’’ and the double-D symbol

are trademarks of Dolby LaboratoriesLicensing Corporation.

Optional on all U.S. modelsTo Play a Tape To Stop Playing a Tape

Playing a Tape (Optional)F

eatures

145

０４／０８／０５　１０：５９：１２　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０１４８　

－▲

▼

－

－

－

To fast forward thetape, push the upper side ( ) of theCH/DISC bar. You will see FF in theupper display. To rewind the tape,push the lower side ( ) of the CH/DISC bar. You will see REWdisplayed. Press either side of theCH/DISC bar or touch the FF, REWor PLAY/PROG icon to take thesystem out of rewind or fast forward.

Press the side to findthe beginning of the current song orpassage. Press the side to findthe beginning of the next song orpassage. When the system reachesthe beginning of a song or passage, itbegins to play it.

To rewind the tape,push the preset 1 (REW) side of thepreset bar. You will see REW in thedisplay. To fast forward the tape,push the preset 2 (FF) side of thepreset bar. You will see FF displayed.Press the preset 1, 2, or 3 side of thebars to take the system out of rewindor fast forward.

Press the RPT buttonor touch the RPT icon tocontinuously play a song or passage.You will see RPT displayed (in theupper display on models withnavigation system). The track willrepeat until you press the RPTbutton or touch the RPT icon again.

The skip and repeatfunctions use silent periods on thetape to find the end of a song orpassage. These features may notwork if there is almost no gapbetween selections, a high noiselevel, or a silent period in the middleof a selection.




Tape Search Functions

FF/REW

SKIP

FF/REW

REPEAT

146

NOTE:

０４／０８／０５　１０：５９：２１　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０１４９　

The tape player picks up dirt andoxides from the tape. Thiscontamination builds up over timeand causes the sound quality todegrade. To prevent this, you shouldclean the player after every 30 hoursof use.

If you do not clean the tape playerregularly, it may eventually becomeimpossible to remove thecontamination with a normalcleaning kit. Your dealer has acleaning kit available.

Use 100-minute or shorter tapes.Tapes longer than that may break orjam the drive.

Store tapes in their cases to protectthem from dust and moisture. Neverplace tapes where they will beexposed to direct sunlight, high heat,or high humidity. If a tape is exposedto extreme heat or cold, let it reach amoderate temperature beforeinserting it into the player.

If the tape is loose, tighten it byturning the hub with a pencil or yourfinger. If the label is peeling off,remove it or it could cause the tapeto jam in the player. Never try toinsert a warped or damaged tape inthe player.

Never try to insert foreign objectsinto the tape player.

If you see the error message‘‘ ’’ on the display (on theupper display on models withnavigation system), press the tapeeject button to remove the tape fromthe unit. Make sure the tape is notdamaged. If the tape will not eject orthe error message stays on after thetape ejects, take the vehicle to yourdealer.


Caring for the Tape Player

Features

147

０４／０８／０５　１０：５９：３１　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０１５０　

▲ ▼

＋

－

＋－

＋

－Three controls for the audio systemare mounted in the steering wheelhub. These let you control basicfunctions without removing yourhand from the wheel.

The VOL button adjusts the volumeup ( ) or down ( ). Press the topor bottom of the button and hold ituntil the desired volume is reached,then release it.

If you are listening to the radio, usethe CH button to change stations.Each time you press the top ( ) ofthe button, the system goes to thenext preset station on the band youare listening to. Press the bottom( ) to go back to the previousstation.

If you are playing a CD, the systemskips to the beginning of the nexttrack each time you press the top( ) of the CH button. Press thebottom ( ) to return to thebeginning of the current track. Pressit twice to return to the previoustrack. You will see the disc and tracknumbers in the display.

If you are playing a tape in theoptional tape player, press the top( ) of the CH button to advance tothe next selection. Press the bottom( ) to go back to the previousselection. The system senses a silentperiod, then resumes playing.

The MODE button changes themode. Pressing the buttonrepeatedly selects FM1, FM2, AM,CD (if a CD is loaded), or a tape (ifequipped). On models with satelliteradio system, you can also selectXM1 and XM2.

On all EX and V6 models

Remote Audio Controls

148

CH BUTTONVOL BUTTON

MODE BUTTON

０４／０８／０５　１０：５９：４０　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０１５１　

－Your vehicle’s audio system willdisable itself if it is disconnectedfrom electrical power for any reason.To make it work again, you mustenter a specific code using the presetbars or the TUNE knob. Becausethere are hundreds of numbercombinations possible, making thesystem work without knowing theexact code is nearly impossible.

You should have received a card thatlists your audio system’s code andserial numbers. It is best to store thiscard in a safe place at home. Inaddition, you should write the audiosystem’s serial number in thisOwner’s Manual.

If your vehicle’s battery isdisconnected or goes dead, or theradio fuse is removed, the audiosystem will disable itself. If thishappens, you will see ‘‘ ’’/‘‘ ’’ in the frequency displaythe next time you turn on the system.Use the preset bars to enter the code.The code is on the radio code cardincluded in your Owner’s Manual kit.When it is entered correctly, theradio will start playing.

If you make a mistake entering thecode, do not start over; complete thesequence, then enter the correctcode. You have ten tries to enter thecorrect code. If you are unsuccessfulin ten attempts, you must then leavethe system on for 1 hour beforetrying again.

You will have to store your favoritestations on each side of the presetbars (1 6) or icons after the systembegins working. Your originalsettings were lost when the powerwas disconnected.

If you lose the card, you must obtainthe code number from a dealer. Todo this, you will need the system’sserial number.

On EX, EX-V6, and LX-V6 models

Radio Theft ProtectionF

eatures

149

０４／０８／０５　１０：５９：４９　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０１５２　

The upper display shows the timewhen the ignition switch is in theACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.The navigation system receivessignals from the Global PositioningSystem (GPS), and the displayedtime is updated automatically by theGPS. Refer to the navigation systemowner’s manual to set up the time.

If your vehicle’s battery isdisconnected or goes dead, you willneed to set the clock.

To set the time, press the clock setbutton (SOUND) until you hear abeep. The displayed time begins toblink.

Press and hold the H (Preset 4) sideof the bar until the hour advances tothe desired time. Press and hold theM (Preset 5) side of the bar until theminutes advance to the desired time.

Press the clock set button (SOUND)again to enter the set time.

You can quickly set the time to thenearest hour. If the displayed time isbefore the half hour, pressing theclock set (SOUND) button until youhear a beep, then pressing the R(Preset 6) side of the bar sets theclock back to the previous hour. If

the displayed time is after the halfhour, the clock sets forward to thebeginning of the next hour.

For example:1:06 will reset to 1:001:53 will reset to 2:00



Setting the Clock

150

CLOCK SET BUTTON

PRESET BARS

CLOCKEX with Leather and EX-V6 modelswithout navigation system

０４／０８／０５　１１：００：０３　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０１５３　

Once the security system is set,opening either door without usingthe key or the remote transmitter,the hood, or the trunk will cause thesystem to alarm. It also alarms if theradio is removed from the dashboardor the wiring is cut.

With the system set, you can stillopen the trunk with the remotetransmitter without triggering thealarm. The alarm will sound if thetrunk lock is forced, or the trunk isopened with the trunk release handleor the emergency trunk opener.

The security system will not set ifthe hood, trunk, or either door is notfully closed. If the system will not set,check the door and trunk openmonitor on the instrument panel (seepage ), to see if the doors and thetrunk are fully closed. Since it is notpart of the monitor display, manuallycheck the hood.

Do not attempt to alter this systemor add other devices to it.

The security system helps to protectyour vehicle and valuables from theft.The horn sounds and a combinationof headlights, parking lights, sidemarker lights, and taillights flashes ifsomeone attempts to break into yourvehicle or remove the radio. Thisalarm continues for 2 minutes, thenthe system resets. To reset analarming system before the 2minutes have elapsed, unlock thedriver’s door with the key or theremote transmitter.

The security system automaticallysets 15 seconds after you lock thedoors, hood, and trunk. For thesystem to activate, you must lock thedoors from the outside with the key,lock tab, door lock switch, or remotetransmitter. The security systemindicator on the instrument panelstarts blinking immediately to showyou the system is setting itself.

59

If equipped

Security SystemF

eatures

151


０４／０８／０５　１１：００：１１　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０１５４　

Cruise control allows you to maintaina set speed above 25 mph (40 km/h)without keeping your foot on theaccelerator pedal. It should be usedfor cruising on straight, openhighways. It is not recommended forcity driving, winding roads, slipperyroads, heavy rain, or bad weather.

Accelerate to the desired cruisingspeed above 25 mph (40 km/h).

Press and release the DECEL/SET button on the steering wheel.The CRUISE CONTROL indicatoron the instrument panel comes onto show the system is nowactivated.

When climbing a steep hill, theautomatic transmission maydownshift to hold the set speed.

Push in the CRUISE button on thesteering wheel. The CRUISEMAIN indicator on the instrumentpanel will come on.

Cruise control may not hold the setspeed when you are going up anddown hills. If your speed increasesgoing down a hill, use the brakes toslow down. This will cancel cruisecontrol. To resume the set speed,press the RESUME/ACCEL button.The CRUISE CONTROL indicatoron the instrument panel will comeback on.

1.

2.

3.

Cruise Control

Using Cruise Control

152

CANCELBUTTON

RES/ACCELBUTTON

DECEL/SETBUTTON

CRUISE BUTTON

Improper use of the cruisecontrol can lead to a crash.

Use the cruise control onlywhen traveling on openhighways in good weather.

０４／０８／０５　１１：００：２２　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０１５５　

You can increase the set cruisingspeed in any of these ways:

Press and hold the RES/ACCELbutton. When you reach thedesired cruising speed, release thebutton.

Push on the accelerator pedal untilyou reach the desired cruisingspeed, then press the DECEL/SET button.

You can decrease the set cruisingspeed in any of these ways:

Press and hold the DECEL/SETbutton. Release the button whenyou reach the desired speed.

Tap the brake or clutch pedallightly with your foot. TheCRUISE CONTROL indicator onthe instrument panel will go out.When the vehicle slows to thedesired speed, press the DECEL/SET button.

To increase the speed in verysmall amounts, tap the RES/ACCEL button. Each time you dothis, your vehicle will speed upabout 1 mph (1.6 km/h).

To slow down in very smallamounts, tap the DECEL/SETbutton. Each time you do this,your vehicle will slow down about1 mph (1.6 km/h).

Even with cruise control turned on,you can still use the acceleratorpedal to speed up for passing. Aftercompleting the pass, take your footoff the accelerator pedal. The vehiclewill return to the set cruising speed.

Resting your foot on the brake orclutch pedal cause cruise control tocancel.

Cruise Control

Changing the Set Speed

Features

153

０４／０８／０５　１１：００：３５　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０１５６　

Tap the brake or clutch pedal.

Push the CANCEL button on thesteering wheel.

When you push the CANCEL button,or tap the brake or clutch pedal, thesystem will remember the previouslyset cruising speed. To return to thatspeed, accelerate to above 25 mph(40 km/h), then press and releasethe RES/ACCEL button. TheCRUISE CONTROL indicator comeson, and the vehicle will accelerate tothe same cruising speed as before.

You can cancel cruise control in anyof these ways:

Push the CRUISE button on thesteering wheel.

Pressing the CRUISE button turnsthe system off and erases theprevious cruising speed.

Cruise Control

Resuming the Set SpeedCancelling Cruise Control

154

CANCEL BUTTON

CRUISE BUTTON

０４／０８／０５　１１：００：４５　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０１５７　

－

The HomeLink UniversalTransceiver built into your vehiclecan be programmed to operate up tothree remote controlled devicesaround your home, such as garagedoors, lighting, or home securitysystems.

If you are training HomeLink tooperate a garage door or gate, youshould unplug the motor for thatdevice during training. Repeatedlypressing the remote control buttoncould burn out the motor.

They do not have the safety featurethat causes the motor to stop andreverse if an obstacle is detectedduring closing, increasing the risk ofinjury.

For quick and accurate training,make sure the remote controltransmitter for the device (garagedoor, automatic gate, securitysystem, etc.) has a fresh battery.

If you justreceived your vehicle and have nottrained any of the buttons inHomeLink before, you should eraseany previously learned codes beforetraining the first button.

To do this, press and hold the twooutside buttons on the HomeLinktransceiver for about 20 seconds, oruntil the red indicator flashes.Release the buttons, then go to step1.

HomeLink stores the code in apermanent memory. There shouldbe no need to retrain HomeLink ifyour vehicle’s battery goes dead or isdisconnected. If your garage dooropener was manufactured beforeApril 1982, you may not be able toprogram HomeLink to operate it.

Always refer to the operatinginstructions and safety informationthat came with your garage dooropener or other equipment youintend to operate with HomeLink. Ifyou do not have this information,contact the manufacturer of theequipment.

If you are training the second orthird buttons, go directly to step 1.

CONTINUED

On EX-V6 model

HomeLink Universal Transceiver

General Information

Training HomeLinkBefore you begin


Features

155

０４／０８／０５　１１：００：５６　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０１５８　

Press and hold the remote controlbutton and one of the HomeLinkbuttons at the same time.

Unplug the garage door openermotor from the house current.

Hold the end of the garage dooropener remote control 2 to 5inches from HomeLink. Makesure you are not blocking yourview of the red indicator inHomeLink.

Plug in the garage door openermotor, then test the HomeLinkbutton by pushing it. If the buttondoes not work, repeat theprocedure to train it again. If it stilldoes not work, you may have avariable or rolling code garagedoor opener. See if you do bypressing and holding theHomeLink button you just trained.If the red indicator blinks for 2seconds then stays on, you have arolling code garage door opener.Go to ‘‘Training with a RollingCode System’’ (see page ).

Repeat these steps to train theother two HomeLink buttons tooperate any other remotely-controlled devices around yourhome (lighting, automatic gate,security system, etc.).

When the red indicator flashesrapidly, release both buttons.HomeLink should have learnedthe code from the remote control.

The red indicator in HomeLinkshould begin flashing. It will flashslowly at first, then rapidly.2.

3.

4.1.

5.

6.

7.

157


156

The remote control you are trainingf rom may stop transmitting af ter 2seconds. This is not enough f orHomeLink to learn the code. Releaseand press the button on the remotecontrol every 2 seconds until HomeLinkhas learned the code.

０４／０８／０５　１１：０１：０６　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０１５９　

For security purposes, newer garagedoor opening systems use a ‘‘rolling’’or variable code. Information fromthe remote control and the garagedoor opener are needed beforeHomeLink can operate the garagedoor opener.

The ‘‘Training HomeLink’’procedure trains HomeLink to theproper garage door opener code.The following proceduresynchronizes HomeLink to thegarage door opener so it sends andreceives the correct codes.

Make sure you have properlycompleted the ‘‘TrainingHomeLink’’ procedure.

Press the training button on thegarage door opener unit until theindicator next to the button comeson, then release it. The indicatormay blink, or come on and stay on.You then have approximately 30seconds to complete the followingsteps.

Press and hold the button onHomeLink for 3 to 4 seconds.

Press and hold the HomeLinkbutton again for 3 to 4 seconds.This should turn off the trainingindicator on the garage dooropener unit. (Some systems mayrequire you to press the button upto three times.)

Press the HomeLink button again.It should operate the garage door.

Find the ‘‘Training’’ button on yourgarage door opener unit. Thelocation will vary, depending onthe manufacturer.

6.

2.

4.

5.

1.

3.

Training With a Rolling CodeSystem

HomeLink Universal TransceiverF

eatures

157

TRAINING BUTTON

０４／０８／０５　１１：０１：１８　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０１６０　




You should erase all three codesbefore selling the vehicle.

To train an already programmedHomeLink button with a new device,you do not have to erase all thememory. Train the selected buttonover the existing memory codefollowing the steps under

.

To erase the codes stored in all threebuttons, press and hold the twooutside buttons until the redindicator begins to flash, thenrelease the buttons.

If you have problems with trainingthe HomeLink Universal Transceiver,or would like information on homeproducts that can be operated byHomeLink, call (800) 355-3515. Onthe Internet, go towww.homelink.com.

HomeLink is a registeredtrademark of Johnson Controls, Inc.


Erasing Codes Customer Assistance

Retraining a Button

‘‘TrainingHomeLink’’

158

０４／０８／０５　１１：０１：２８　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０１６１　

Before you begin driving yourvehicle, you should know whatgasoline to use and how to check thelevels of important fluids. You alsoneed to know how to properly storeluggage or packages. Theinformation in this section will helpyou. If you plan to add anyaccessories to your vehicle, pleaseread the information in this sectionfirst.

.............................Break-in Period . 160.................Fuel Recommendation . 160

.........Service Station Procedures . 161....................................Refueling . 161

Opening and Closing................................the Hood . 162

...................................Oil Check . 164.............Engine Coolant Check . 165

...............................Fuel Economy . 166...Accessories and Modifications . 167

.............................Carrying Cargo . 169

Before DrivingB

eforeD

riving

159

０４／０８／０５　１１：０１：３３　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０１６２　

Help assure your vehicle’s futurereliability and performance by payingextra attention to how you driveduring the first 600 miles (1,000 km).During this period:

In addition, in order to maintain goodperformance, fuel economy, andemissions control, we stronglyrecommend, in areas where it isavailable, the use of gasoline thatdoes NOT contain manganese-basedfuel additives such as MMT.

Do not tow a trailer.

Use of gasoline with these additivesmay adversely affect performance,and cause the malfunction indicatorlamp on your instrument panel tocome on. If this happens, contactyour authorized dealer for service.

Some gasoline today is blended withoxygenates such as ethanol orMTBE. Your vehicle is designed tooperate on oxygenated gasolinecontaining up to 10 percent ethanolby volume and up to 15 percentMTBE by volume. Do not usegasoline containing methanol.

Avoid full-throttle starts and rapidacceleration.

Do not change the oil until thescheduled maintenance time.

Avoid hard braking for the first200 miles (300 km).

You should also follow theserecommendations with anoverhauled or exchanged engine, orwhen the brakes are replaced.

Your vehicle is designed to operateon unleaded gasoline with a pumpoctane number of 86 or higher. Useof a lower octane gasoline can causea persistent, heavy metallic rappingnoise that can lead to engine damage.

If you drive with the low enginespeed (below than about 1,000 rpm),you may feel the engine knocking. Inthis case, you can use premiumunleaded gasoline with a pumpoctane number of 91 or higher toprevent the engine from knocking.

We recommend using qualitygasoline containing detergentadditives that help prevent fuelsystem and engine deposits.

On EX-V6 with manual transmission

Break-in Period Fuel Recommendation

Break-in Period, Fuel Recommendation

160

０４／０８／０５　１１：０１：４７　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０１６３　

CONTINUED

Open the fuel fill door by pushingon the handle to the left of thedriver’s seat.

If you notice any undesirableoperating symptoms, try anotherservice station or switch to anotherbrand of gasoline.

For further important fuel-relatedinformation, please refer to your

.

Park with the driver’s side closestto the service station pump.

1.

2.

Refueling

Quick Start Guide

Fuel Recommendation, Service Station ProceduresB

eforeD

riving

161

FUEL FILL CAP

TETHER

Push

ATTACHMENT

Gasoline is highly flammableand explosive. You can beburned or seriously injuredwhen handling fuel.

Stop the engine and keepheat, sparks, and flame away.Handle fuel only outdoors.Wipe up spills immediately.

０４／０８／０５　１１：０１：５７　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０１６４　

Park the vehicle, and set theparking brake. Pull the hoodrelease handle located under thelower left corner of the dashboard.The hood will pop up slightly.

Remove the fuel fill cap slowly.You may hear a hissing sound aspressure inside the tank escapes.The fuel fill cap is attached to thefuel filler with a tether. Put theattachment on the fuel fill cap intothe slit on the fuel fill door.

Stop filling the tank after the fuelnozzle automatically clicks off. Donot try to ‘‘top off’’ the tank. Leavesome room for the fuel to expandwith temperature changes.

even though the tank is not full,there may be a problem with yourvehicle’s fuel vapor recoverysystem. The system helps keepfuel vapors from going into theatmosphere. Try filling at anotherpump. If this does not fix theproblem, consult your dealer.

Screw the fuel fill cap back onuntil it clicks at least three times.If you do not properly tighten thecap, the malfunction indicatorlamp may come on (see page ).

Push the fuel fill door closed untilit latches.

5.

6.

1.

3.

4.

261

If the fuel nozzle keeps clicking off

Service Station Procedures

Opening and Closing the Hood

162

HOOD RELEASE HANDLE

０４／０８／０５　１１：０２：０７　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０１６５　

Lift the hood up most of the way.The hydraulic supports will lift itup the rest of the way and hold itup.

Reach in between the hood andthe front grille with your finger.The hood latch handle is aboveand to the left of the ‘‘H’’ logo.Push this handle up until itreleases the hood. Lift the hood.

If the hood latch handle movesstiffly, or if you can open the hoodwithout lifting the handle, themechanism should be cleaned andlubricated.

To close the hood, lift it up slightlyto remove the support rod fromthe hole. Put the support rod backinto its holding clip. Lower thehood to about a foot (30 cm) abovethe fender, then let it drop. Makesure it is securely latched.

To close the hood, lower the hood toabout a foot (30 cm) above thefender, then press down firmly withyour hands. Make sure it is securelylatched.

Pull the support rod out of its clipby holding the grip, and insert theend into the designated hole in thehood.

3.2. 6-cylinder models4-cylinder models

Service Station ProceduresB

eforeD

riving

163

GRIP

CLIP


LATCH

０４／０８／０５　１１：０２：１７　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０１６６　

Wait a few minutes after turning theengine off before you check the oil.

Remove the dipstick (orangehandle/loop).

Wipe off the dipstick with a cleancloth or paper towel.

Insert it all the way back in its hole.

Remove the dipstick again, andcheck the level. It should bebetween the upper and lowermarks.

If it is near or below the lower mark,see on page .

1.

2.

3.

4.

213


Oil Check

Adding Engine Oil

164

DIPSTICK(Orange Handle)

DIPSTICK(Orange Loop)

UPPER MARK

LOWER MARK

4-cylinder models 6-cylinder models 4-cylinder models

０４／０８／０５　１１：０２：３０　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０１６７　

Look at the coolant level in theradiator reserve tank. Make sure it isbetween the MAX and MIN lines. Ifit is below the MIN line, see

on page forinformation on adding the propercoolant.

Refer toon page for information

about checking other items on yourvehicle.

217

200


Engine Coolant Check

AddingEngine Coolant

Owner’s MaintenanceChecks

Before

Driving

165

UPPER MARKLOWER MARK

RESERVE TANK

4-cylinder models

MIN

MAX

MAX RESERVE TANK

6-cylinder models MIN6-cylinder models

０４／０８／０５　１１：０２：３８　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０１６８　

Always maintain your vehicleaccording to the maintenanceschedule. See

(see page).

an underinflated tirecauses more ‘‘rolling resistance,’’which uses more fuel.

The build-up of snow or mud onyour vehicle’s underside addsweight and rolling resistance.Frequent cleaning helps your fuelmileage and reduces the chance ofcorrosion.

Always drive in the highest gearpossible.

Try to maintain a constant speed.Every time you slow down andspeed up, your vehicle uses extrafuel. Use the cruise control whenappropriate.

Combine several short trips intoone.

The air conditioning puts an extraload on the engine which makes ituse more fuel. Use the fresh-airventilation when possible.

Drive moderately. Rapidacceleration, abrupt cornering,and hard braking use more fuel.

200

For example,

Fuel Economy

Improving Fuel Economy

Owner’sMaintenance Checks

166

０４／０８／０５　１１：０２：４７　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０１６９　

When properly installed, cellularphones, alarms, two-way radios, andlow-powered audio systems shouldnot interfere with your vehicle’scomputer controlled systems, suchas your airbags and anti-lock brakes.

Before installing any accessory:

Make sure the accessory does notobscure any lights, or interferewith proper vehicle operation orperformance.

Be sure electronic accessories donot overload electrical circuits(see page ) or interfere withproper operation.

Modifying your vehicle, or installingsome non-Honda accessories, canmake it unsafe. Before you make anymodifications or add any accessories,be sure to read the followinginformation.

Your dealer has Honda accessoriesthat allow you to personalize yourvehicle, or improve its performance.These accessories have beendesigned and approved for yourvehicle, and are covered by warranty.

Before installing any electronicaccessory, have the installercontact your dealer for assistance.If possible, have your dealerinspect the final installation.

Do not install accessories on theside pillars or across the rearwindows as these may interferewith proper operation of the sidecurtain airbags.

Although non-Honda accessoriesmay fit on your vehicle, they may notmeet factory specifications, andcould adversely affect your vehicle’shandling and stability.

264

Accessories

Accessories and ModificationsB

eforeD

riving

167

Improper accessories ormodifications can affect yourvehicle’s handling, stability, andperformance, and cause acrash in which you can be hurtor killed.

Follow all instructions in thisowner’s manual regardingaccessories and modifications.

０４／０８／０５　１１：０２：５７　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０１７０　

Some examples are:

Larger or smaller wheels and tirescan interfere with the operation ofyour vehicle’s anti-lock brakes andother systems.

If you plan to modify your vehicle,consult your dealer.

Modifying your steering wheel orany other part of your vehicle’ssafety features can make thesystems ineffective.

Removing parts from your vehicle,or replacing components withnon-Honda components couldseriously affect your vehicle’shandling, stability, and reliability.

Lowering your vehicle with anon-Honda suspension kit thatsignificantly reduces groundclearance can allow theundercarriage to hit speed bumpsor other raised objects, whichcould cause the airbags to deploy.

Raising your vehicle with anon-Honda suspension kit canaffect the handling and stability.

Non-Honda wheels, because theyare a universal design, can causeexcessive stress on suspensioncomponents.

Modifying Your Vehicle

Accessories and Modifications

168

０４／０８／０５　１１：０３：０６　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０１７１　

Your vehicle has several convenientstorage areas:

Glove boxDoor and seat-back pocketsTrunk, including the rear seatswhen folded downCenter pocketConsole compartmentRoof-rack (if installed)

However, carrying too much cargo,or improperly storing it, can affectyour vehicle’s handling, stability,stopping distance, and tires, andmake it unsafe. Before carrying anytype of cargo, be sure to read thefollowing pages.

CONTINUED

Carrying CargoB

eforeD

riving

169

CONSOLE COMPARTMENT

TRUNK GLOVE BOX

CENTER POCKET

DOOR POCKET

SEAT-BACK POCKETS

０４／０８／０５　１１：０３：１６　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０１７２　

－ ×

The maximum load for your vehicleis 850 lbs (395 kg). This figureincludes the total weight of alloccupants, cargo, and accessories,and the tongue load if you are towinga trailer.

Determine the combined weightof luggage and cargo being loadedon the vehicle. That weight maynot safely exceed the availablecargo and luggage load capacity inStep 4.

Locate the statement, ‘‘thecombined weight of occupants andcargo should never exceed 850lbs’’ on your vehicle’s placard.[The placard is on the driver’sdoorjamb.]

Determine the combined weightof the driver and passengers thatwill be riding in your vehicle.

Subtract the combined weight ofthe driver and passengers from850 pounds or 395 kilograms.

The resulting figure equals theavailable amount of cargo andluggage load capacity. Forexample, if the maximum load is850 lbs and there will be five 150 lb.passengers in your vehicle, theamount of available cargo andluggage load capacity is 100 lbs.(850 750 (5 150) = 100 lbs.)

If your vehicle will be towing atrailer, load from your trailer willbe transferred to your vehicle.Consult this manual to determinehow this reduces the availablecargo and luggage load capacity ofyour vehicle (see page ).

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

190

Carrying Cargo

Load Limits

170

Overloading or improperloading can affect handling andstability and cause a crash inwhich you can be hurt or killed.

Follow all load limits and otherloading guidelines in thismanual.

０４／０８／０５　１１：０３：２５　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０１７３　

Distribute cargo evenly on thefloor of the trunk, placing theheaviest items on the bottom andas far forward as possible.

If you fold down the back seat, tiedown items that could be thrownabout the vehicle during a crash orsudden stop.

If you carry large items thatprevent you from closing the trunklid, exhaust gas can enter thepassenger area. To avoid thepossibility of

, follow the instructionson page .

Store or secure all items that couldbe thrown around and hurtsomeone during a crash.

Do not put any items on top of therear shelf. They can block yourview and be thrown around thevehicle during a crash.

Be sure items placed on the floorbehind the front seats cannot rollunder the seats and interfere withthe driver’s ability to operate thepedals, proper operation of theseats, and proper operation of thesensors under the seats.

Keep the glove box closed whiledriving. If it is open, a passengercould injure their knees during acrash or sudden stop.

In addition, the total weight of thevehicle, all passengers, accessories,cargo, and trailer tongue load mustnot exceed the Gross VehicleWeight Rating (GVWR) or the GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR). Bothare on a label on the driver’sdoorjamb.

49

CONTINUED

Carrying Cargo

Carrying Cargo in the Trunk or ona Roof Rack

carbon monoxidepoisoning

Carrying Items in the PassengerCompartment

Before

Driving

171

０４／０８／０５　１１：０３：３７　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０１７４　

The cargo net can be used to helphold down items stored in the trunk.To use the cargo net, hook it to thebuttons on the floor and sides of thetrunk. You can use the cargo net inseveral configurations by hooking itto different buttons.

When you are not using the cargonet, store it in the spare tire well.

There are hooks on the floor andsides of the trunk. They can be usedto install a net for securing items.

If you carry any items on a roofrack, be sure the total weight ofthe rack and the items does notexceed the maximum allowableweight. Please contact your dealerfor further information.

If you use an accessory roof rack,the roof rack weight limit may belower. Refer to the information thatcame with your roof rack.

On all EX and EX-V6 models

Carrying Cargo

Cargo NetTrunk Hooks

172

０４／０８／０５　１１：０３：４７　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０１７５　

This section gives you tips onstarting the engine under variousconditions, and how to operate themanual and automatic transmissions.It also includes importantinformation on parking your vehicle,the braking system, the tractioncontrol system, and facts you need ifyou are planning to tow a trailer.

........................Preparing to Drive . 174.......................Starting the Engine . 175

...................Manual Transmission . 176..............Automatic Transmission . 179

...........................................Parking . 183.............................Braking System . 184

...............Anti-lock Brakes (ABS) . 185..Traction Control System (TCS) . 187

...........................Towing a Trailer . 190

DrivingD

riving

173

０４／０８／０５　１１：０３：５１　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０１７６　

You should do the following checksand adjustments before you driveyour vehicle.

Make sure all windows, mirrors,and outside lights are clean andunobstructed. Remove frost, snow,or ice.

Check that the hood is fully closed.

Check the seat adjustment (seepage ).

Check the adjustment of theinside and outside mirrors (seepage ).

Check the steering wheeladjustment (see page ).

Make sure the doors and thetrunk are securely closed andlocked.

Fasten your seat belt. Check thatyour passengers have fastenedtheir seat belts (see page ).

When you start the engine, checkthe gauges and indicators in theinstrument panel (see page ).

Check that the trunk is fullyclosed.

Visually check the tires. If a tirelooks low, use a gauge to check itspressure.

Check that any items you may becarrying are stored properly orfastened down securely.

2.

1.

6.

7.

8.

9.

14

3.

4.

5.

10.

11.

81

93

72

55

Preparing to Drive

174

０４／０８／０５　１１：０４：０３　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０１７７　

Apply the parking brake.

In cold weather, turn off allelectrical accessories to reducethe drain on the battery.

Push the clutch pedal down all theway. START (III) does notfunction unless the clutch pedal ispressed.

Make sure the shift lever is inPark. Press on the brake pedal.

Without touching the acceleratorpedal, turn the ignition key to theSTART (III) position. Do not holdthe key in START for more than15 seconds at a time. If the enginedoes not start right away, pausefor at least 10 seconds beforetrying again.

If the engine does not start within15 seconds, or starts but stallsright away, repeat step 4 with theaccelerator pedal pressed halfwaydown. If the engine starts, releasepressure on the accelerator pedalso the engine does not race.

If the engine fails to start, pressthe accelerator pedal all the waydown and hold it there whilestarting to clear flooding. If theengine still does not start, returnto step 5.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

Manual Transmission:

Automatic Transmission:

Starting the EngineD

riving

175

Immobilizer System

The immobilizer system protects yourvehicle f rom thef t. If an improperly-coded key (or other device) is used, theengine’s f uel system is disabled. See

on page .

The engine is harder to start in coldweather. Also, the thinner air f ound ataltitudes above 8,000 f eet (2,400meters) adds to this problem.

74

０４／０８／０５　１１：０４：１５　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０１７８　

The manual transmission issynchronized in all forward gears forsmooth operation. It has a lockout soyou cannot shift directly from Fifthto Reverse.

On vehicles with 6-speed manualtransmission, the lockout systemprevents you from shifting directly

from Fifth to Reverse instead ofSixth (see page ).

When shifting up or down, makesure you push the clutch pedal downall the way, shift to the next gear,and let the pedal up gradually. Whenyou are not shifting, do not rest yourfoot on the clutch pedal. This cancause your clutch to wear out faster.

Come to a full stop before you shiftinto Reverse. You can damage the

transmission by trying to shift intoReverse with the vehicle moving.Push down the clutch pedal, andpause for a few seconds beforeshifting into Reverse, or shift intoone of the forward gears for amoment. This stops the gears sothey won’t ‘‘grind.’’

When slowing down, you can getextra braking from the engine byshifting to a lower gear. This extrabraking can help you maintain a safespeed and prevent your brakes fromoverheating while going down asteep hill. Before downshifting,make sure the engine speed will notgo into the tachometer’s red zone inthe lower gear.

178On all 4-cylinder models with 5-speedmanual transmissionOn EX-V6 model with 6-speed manualtransmission

Manual Transmission

176

5-speed M/T 6-speed M/T

０４／０８／０５　１１：０４：２３　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０１７９　

Shift up

1st to 2nd2nd to 3rd3rd to 4th4th to 5th5th to 6th

Normal acceleration

15 mph (24 km/h)25 mph (40 km/h)40 mph (64 km/h)47 mph (75 km/h)52 mph (83 km/h)

Shift up

1st to 2nd2nd to 3rd3rd to 4th4th to 5th

Normal acceleration

15 mph (25 km/h)25 mph (40 km/h)40 mph (65 km/h)50 mph (80 km/h)

Your vehicle is equipped with analuminum shift lever. If you leave thevehicle parked outside for a longtime on a hot day, be careful beforemoving the shift lever. Because ofthe heat, the shift lever may beextremely hot. If the outsidetemperature is low, the shift leverfeels cold.

Drive in the highest gear that letsthe engine run and acceleratesmoothly. This will give you goodfuel economy and effectiveemissions control. The followingshift points are recommended:

On EX-V6 model

With 5-speed manual transmission

With 6-speed manual transmissionRecommended Shift Points

Manual TransmissionD

riving

177

Rapid slowing or speeding-upcan cause loss of control onslippery surfaces. If you crash,you can be injured.

Use extra care when driving onslippery surfaces.

０４／０８／０５　１１：０４：３３　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０１８０　

If you exceed the maximum speedfor the gear you are in, the enginespeed will enter into the tachometer’sred zone. If this occurs, you may feelthe engine cut in and out. This iscaused by a limiter in the engine’scomputer controls. The engine willrun normally when you reduce theRPM below the red zone.

Before downshifting, make sure theengine will not go into thetachometer’s red zone.

If you are still unable to shift toReverse, apply the parking brake,and turn the ignition key toACCESSORY (I) or LOCK (0).

With the clutch pedal still pressed,start the engine.

The manual transmission haslockout so you cannot accidentallyshift from Fifth to Reverse instead ofSixth while the vehicle is moving. Ifyou cannot shift to Reverse when thevehicle is stopped:

With the clutch pedal pressed,move the shift lever to the first/second gear side of the Neutralgate, then shift to Reverse.

Press the clutch pedal, and shift toReverse.

If you need to use this procedure toshift to Reverse, your vehicle may bedeveloping a problem. Have thevehicle checked by your dealer.

1.

2.

3.

4.

6-speed manual transmission onlyEngine Speed Limiter Reverse Lockout

Manual Transmission

178

０４／０８／０５　１１：０４：４７　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０１８１　

These indicators between the tacho-meter and speedometer show whichposition the shift lever is in.

The ‘‘D’’ indicator comes on for afew seconds when you turn theignition switch to ON (II). If itflashes while driving (in any shiftposition), it indicates a possibleproblem in the transmission.

If the malfunction indicator lampcomes on along with the ‘‘D’’indicator, there is a problem in theautomatic transmission controlsystem. Avoid rapid acceleration, andhave the transmission checked byyour dealer as soon as possible.

To shift from any position, pressfirmly on the brake pedal and pressthe release button on the side of theshift lever. You cannot shift out ofPark when the ignition switch is inthe LOCK (0) or ACCESSORY (I)position.

CONTINUED

ShiftingShift Lever Position Indicators

Automatic TransmissionD

riving

179

SHIFT LEVER

RELEASE BUTTON

０４／０８／０５　１１：０４：５６　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０１８２　

－－

－

To shift from:P to R

R to PN to RD to 22 to 11 to 2

2 to DD to DD to ND to DN to DR to N

Do this:Press the brake pedal andpress the release button.

Press the release button.

Move the lever.

3

3

3

3

This position mechani-cally locks the transmission. UsePark whenever you are turning off orstarting the engine. To shift out ofPark, you must press on the brakepedal and have your foot off theaccelerator pedal. Press the releasebutton on the side of the shift leverto move it.

If you have done all of the above andstill cannot move the lever out ofPark, see onpage .

You must also press the releasebutton to shift into Park. To avoidtransmission damage, come to acomplete stop before shifting intoPark. The shift lever must be in Parkbefore you can remove the key fromthe ignition switch.

Press the brakepedal and press the release buttonon the side of the shift lever to shiftfrom Park to Reverse. To shift fromReverse to Neutral, come to acomplete stop and then shift. Pressthe release button before shiftinginto Reverse from Neutral.

Use Neutral if youneed to restart a stalled engine, or ifit is necessary to stop briefly withthe engine idling. Shift to the Parkposition if you need to leave yourvehicle for any reason. Press on thebrake pedal when you are movingthe shift lever from Neutral toanother gear.

182

Automatic Transmission

Park (P)

Shift Lock Release

Reverse (R)

Neutral (N)

180

０４／０８／０５　１１：０５：０４　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０１８３　

－

－

－

－

If you exceed the maximum speedfor the gear you are in, the enginespeed will enter into the tachometer’sred zone. If this occurs, you may feelthe engine cut in and out. This iscaused by a limiter in the engine’scomputer controls. The engine willrun normally when you reduce theRPM below the red zone.

Use Second gear:For more power when climbing.To increase engine braking whengoing down steep hills.For starting out on a slipperysurface or in deep snow.

Use this position foryour normal driving. Thetransmission automatically selects asuitable gear (1 through 5) for yourspeed and acceleration. You maynotice the transmission shifting up athigher engine speeds when theengine is cold. This helps the enginewarm up faster.

This position issimilar to D, except only the firstthree gears are selected. Use Dwhen towing a trailer in hilly terrain,or to provide engine braking whengoing down a steep hill. D can alsokeep the transmission from cyclingbetween third and fourth gears instop-and-go driving.

To shift to Second,press the release button on the sideof the shift lever. This position locksthe transmission in second gear. Itdoes not downshift to first gearwhen you come to a stop.

When driving downhill with atrailer.

To help reduce wheel spin.

To shift from Second toFirst, press the release button on theside of the shift lever. This positionlocks the transmission in first gear.By upshifting and downshiftingthrough 1, 2, D , and D, you canoperate this transmission much likea manual transmission without aclutch pedal.

3

3 3


Engine Speed LimiterDrive (D)

Drive (D )

Second (2)

First (1)3

Driving

181

０４／０８／０５　１１：０５：１７　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０１８４　

This allows you to move the shiftlever out of Park if the normalmethod of pushing on the brakepedal and pressing the releasebutton does not work.

Set the parking brake.

Remove the key from the ignitionswitch.

Push down on the key while youpress the release button on theshift lever and move the shift leverout of Park to Neutral.

Put a cloth on the edge of the shiftlock release slot cover. Using asmall flat-tipped screwdriver or ametal fingernail file, carefully pryon the edge of the cover to removeit.

Insert the key in the shift lockrelease slot.

Remove the key from the shiftlock release slot, then reinstall thecover. Make sure the notch on thecover is on the left side. Press thebrake pedal, and restart the engine.

If you need to use the shift lockrelease, it means your vehicle isdeveloping a problem. Have itchecked by your dealer.

1.

2.

3.4.

5.

6.

Shift Lock Release


182

COVERRELEASEBUTTON

SHIFT LOCK RELEASE SLOT

０４／０８／０５　１１：０５：２８　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０１８５　

Always use the parking brake whenyou park your vehicle. Make surethe parking brake is set firmly oryour vehicle may roll if it is parkedon an incline.

If your vehicle has an automatictransmission, set the parking brakebefore you put the transmission inPark. This keeps the vehicle frommoving and putting pressure on theparking mechanism in thetransmission.

If the vehicle is facing uphill, turnthe front wheels away from thecurb. If you have a manualtransmission, put it in first gear.

If the vehicle is facing downhill,turn the front wheels toward thecurb. If you have a manualtransmission, put it in reverse gear.

Make sure the parking brake isfully released before driving away.Driving with the parking brakepartially set can overheat ordamage the rear brakes.

Make sure the moonroof (ifequipped) and the windows areclosed.

Turn off the lights.

Place any packages, valuables, etc.,in the trunk or take them with you.

Lock the doors.

Check the indicator on theinstrument panel to verify that thesecurity system is set.

Never park over dry leaves, tallgrass, or other flammablematerials. The hot three waycatalytic converter could causethese materials to catch on fire.

On vehicles with security system

Parking Tips

ParkingD

riving

183

０４／０８／０５　１１：０５：３９　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０１８６　

Your vehicle is equipped with frontdisc brakes. The brakes on the rearwheels may be disc or drum,depending on the model. A powerassist helps reduce the effort neededon the brake pedal. The ABS helpsyou retain steering control whenbraking very hard.

Constant application of the brakeswhen going down a long hill buildsup heat and reduces their effective-ness. Use the engine to assist thebrakes by taking your foot off theaccelerator and downshifting to alower gear.

Check the brakes after drivingthrough deep water. Apply thebrakes moderately to see if they feelnormal. If not, apply them gently andfrequently until they do. Be extracautious in your driving.

Resting your foot on the pedal keepsthe brakes applied lightly, builds upheat, increases wear, and reducestheir effectiveness. It also keepsyour brake lights on all the time,confusing drivers behind you.

The front and rear disc brakes on allmodels have audible brake wearindicators. All models except for the4-cylinder LX have rear disc brakesas standard equipment.

If the brake pads need replacing, youwill hear a distinctive, metallicscreeching sound when you applythe brake pedal. If you do not havethe brake pads replaced, they willscreech all the time. It is normal forthe brakes to occasionally squeal orsqueak when you apply them.

The hydraulic system that operatesthe brakes has two separate circuits.Each circuit works diagonally acrossthe vehicle (the left-front brake isconnected with the right-rear brake,etc.). If one circuit should develop aproblem, you will still have brakingat two wheels.

Braking System

Braking System Design

Brake Wear Indicators

184

０４／０８／０５　１１：０５：４９　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０１８７　

If the ABS indicator comes on, theanti-lock function of the brakingsystem has shut down. The brakesstill work like a conventional system,but without anti-lock. You shouldhave your dealer inspect your vehicleas soon as possible.

The anti-lock brake system (ABS)helps prevent the brakes fromlocking up, and helps you retainsteering control by pumping thebrakes rapidly, much faster than aperson can do it.

The ABS also balances the front-to-rear braking distribution accordingto vehicle loading.

Let the ABS work for you by alwayskeeping firm, steady pressure on thebrake pedal. This is sometimesreferred to as ‘‘stomp and steer.’’

You will feel a pulsation in the brakepedal when the ABS activates, andyou may hear some noise. This isnormal: it is the ABS rapidlypumping the brakes. On drypavement, you will need to press onthe brake pedal very hard before theABS activates. However, you mayfeel the ABS activate immediately ifyou are trying to stop on snow or ice.

If the indicator comes on whiledriving, test the brakes as instructedon page .262

CONTINUED

You should never pump the brake pedal.

ABS Indicator

Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)D

riving

185

ABS INDICATOR

０４／０８／０５　１１：０５：５８　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０１８８　

If the ABS indicator and the brakesystem indicator come on together,and the parking brake is fullyreleased, the front-to-rear brakingdistribution system may also be shutdown.

Test your brakes as instructed onpage . If the brakes feel normal,drive slowly and have your vehiclerepaired by your dealer as soon aspossible. Avoid sudden hard brakingwhich could cause the rear wheels tolock up and possibly lead to a loss ofcontrol.

It only helps with thesteering control during braking.

such as trying to take acorner too fast or making a suddenlane change. Always drive at a safespeed for the road and weatherconditions.

on loose oruneven surfaces, such as gravel orsnow, than a vehicle without anti-lock. Slow down and allow a greaterdistance between vehicles underthose conditions.

The TCS indicator will come onalong with the ABS indicator.

Always steer moderatelywhen you are braking hard. Severeor sharp steering wheel movementcan still cause your vehicle to veerinto oncoming traffic or off the road.

262

On all V6 models

Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)

Important Safety RemindersABS does not reduce the time ordistance it takes to stop thevehicle.

ABS will not prevent a skid thatresults from changing directionabruptly,

A vehicle with ABS may require alonger distance to stop

ABS cannot prevent a loss ofstability.

186

０４／０８／０５　１１：０６：０６　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０１８９　

Your vehicle is equipped with atraction control system (TCS) toassist you in maintaining tractionwhile driving slowly on loose orslippery surfaces.

TCS monitors the speed of all fourwheels. When it senses a front wheellosing traction, it applies braking tothat wheel. The TCS Activationindicator flashes when this occurs.

Driving with TCS requires no specialskills or technique. The TCS doesnot control your vehicle’s wholebraking system and cannot preventskidding if you enter a corner toofast. It is still your responsibility todrive at reasonable speeds and toleave a sufficient margin of safety.

When starting out or driving on aloose or slippery road surface, youmay notice that the vehicle does notrespond to the accelerator in thesame way it does at other times. Thisis a sign TCS is activating. You willsee the TCS activation indicatorflash.

The TCS indicator (see page )and the TCS activation indicatorcome on and stay on when there is aproblem with the TCS.

You should still install winter tires onyour vehicle during the winter. Makesure to use the same size originallysupplied with the vehicle. Exercisethe same caution in winter driving asyou would if your vehicle was notequipped with TCS.

Driving with the compact spare tireinstalled (see page ) mayactivate the TCS. When driving withthe spare tire installed, turn off theTCS.

58

248

On all V6 models

Traction Control System (TCS)D

riving

187

TCS INDICATOR

TCS ACTIVATION INDICATOR

０４／０８／０５　１１：０６：１５　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０１９０　

Deactivate the system by pressingthe TCS On/Off switch. The TCSactivation indicator comes on as areminder. Pressing the switch againturns the system back on.

The TCS turns on every time youstart the engine, even if you turned itoff the last time you drove thevehicle.

This switch is under the side vent. Itlets you turn the TCS on and off. Youcannot turn off the TCS while theTCS activation indicator is flashing.

This indicator comes on or flashesunder the following conditions:

When you turn the ignition switchto ON (II).

When you manually turn off TCS.

It flashes when TCS is regulatingwheelspin.

If the system’s diagnostics sensesa problem with TCS, the TCSindicator will come on and stay onalong with the TCS activationindicator.

Traction Control System (TCS)

TCS ON/OFF Switch TCS Activation Indicator

188

０４／０８／０５　１１：０６：２６　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０１９１　

This indicator will come on alongwith the ABS indicator if there is aproblem in the anti-lock brakesystem (see on page

).

If the TCS indicator comes on alongwith the brake system indicator, itindicates a problem in the brakesystem (see

on page ).

If the TCS indicator comes on whiledriving, pull to the side of the roadwhen it is safe, and turn off theengine. Reset the system byrestarting the engine. If the TCSindicator remains on, or comes backon while driving, have the TCSinspected by your dealer. You canstill drive the vehicle without TCS.

The TCS indicator may occasionallycome on for 1 or 2 seconds and thengo out. This is normal.

185

262

Traction Control System (TCS)

ABS Indicator

Brake SystemIndicator

Driving

189

０４／０８／０５　１１：０６：３２　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０１９２　

Your vehicle has been designed toprimarily carry passengers and theircargo. You can also use it to tow atrailer if you carefully observe theload limits, use the proper equipment,and follow the guidelines in thissection.

Themaximum allowable weight of thetrailer and everthing in or on itmust not exceed 1,000 lbs (450 kg).Towing a load that is too heavycan seriously affect your vehicle’shandling and performance. It canalso damage the engine anddrivetrain.

The weight thatthe tongue of a fully-loaded trailerputs on the hitch should beapproximately 10 percent of thetotal trailer weight. Too muchtongue load reduces front-tiretraction and steering control. Toolittle tongue load can make thetrailer unstable and cause it tosway.

Towing a Trailer

Load Limits

Total Trailer Weight: Tongue Load:

190

Exceeding any load limit orimproperly loading your vehicleand trailer can cause a crash inwhich you can be seriously hurtor killed.

Check the loading of yourvehicle and trailer carefullybefore starting to drive.

０４／０８／０５　１１：０６：３９　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０１９３　

To achieve a proper tongue load,start by loading 60 percent of theload toward the front of the trailerand 40 percent toward the rear, thenre-adjust the load as needed.

The maximum allowable weight ofthe vehicle, all occupants, all cargo,and the tongue is:

The best way to confirm that vehicleand trailer weights are within limitsis to have them checked at a publicscale.

Using a suitable scale or a specialtongue load gauge, check the tongueload the first time you set up atowing combination (a fully-loadedvehicle and trailer), then recheck thetongue load whenever the conditionschange.

The maximum allowable weight atthe vehicle axles is:

(LX)

on the front axle

on the rear axle

on the front axle

on the rear axle

(EX, EX with Leather)

on the front axle

on the rear axle

(LX)

(EX, EX with Leather)

4-cylinder models:

6-cylinder models:

4-cylinder models:

6-cylinder models:

Towing a Trailer

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating(GVWR):

Checking LoadsGross Axle Weight Rating(GAWR):

Driving

191

2,195 lbs (995 kg)

1,960 lbs (890 kg)

2,360 lbs (1,070 kg)

2,005 lbs (910 kg)

2,225 lbs (1,010 kg)

1,985 lbs (900 kg)4,080 lbs (1,850 kg)

4,125 lbs (1,870 kg)

4,300 lbs (1,950 kg)

０４／０８／０５　１１：０６：４９　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０１９４　

Towing can require a variety ofequipment, depending on the size ofyour trailer, how it will be used, howmuch load you are towing, andwhere you tow.

Discuss your needs with your trailersales or rental agency, and follow theguidelines in this section. Also makesure that all equipment is properlyinstalled and maintained, and that itmeets federal, state, province, andlocal regulations.

Any hitch used on your vehicle mustbe properly bolted to the underbody.

Always use safety chains when youtow a trailer. Make sure the chainsare secured to the trailer and hitch,and that they cross under the tongueand can catch the trailer if itbecomes unhitched. Leave enoughslack to allow the trailer to turncorners easily, but do not let thechains drag on the ground.

See your trailer dealer for moreinformation on installing electricbrakes.

Trailer lights and equipment mustcomply with federal, state, province,and local regulations. Check therequirements for the areas whereyou plan to tow, and use onlyequipment designed for your vehicle.

Since lighting and wiring vary bytrailer type and brand, you shouldhave a qualified technician install asuitable connector between thevehicle and the trailer. Improperequipment or installation can causedamage to your vehicle’s electricalsystem and affect your vehiclewarranty.

Honda requires that any trailer witha total weight of 1,000 lbs (455 kg) ormore be equipped with its ownelectric or surge-type brakes.

If you choose electric brakes, besure they are electrically actuated.Do not attempt to tap into yourvehicle’s hydraulic system. Nomatter how successful it may seem,any attempt to attach trailer brakesto your vehicle’s hydraulic systemwill lower braking effectiveness andcreate a potential hazard.

Towing a Trailer

Towing Equipment andAccessories

Hitches

Safety Chains

Trailer Brakes

Trailer Lights

192

０４／０８／０５　１１：０７：０３　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０１９５　

Many states and Canadian provincesrequire special outside mirrors whentowing a trailer. Even if they don’t,you should install special mirrors ifyou cannot clearly see behind you, orif the trailer creates a blind spot.

Ask your trailer sales or rentalagency if any other items arerecommended or required for yourtowing situation.

When preparing to tow, and beforedriving away, be sure to check thefollowing:

The vehicle has been properlyserviced, and the tires, brakes,suspension, cooling system, andlights are in good operatingcondition.

All weights and loads are withinlimits.

The hitch, safety chains, and anyother attachments are secure.

All items in or on the trailer areproperly secured and cannot shiftwhile you drive.

The lights and brakes on yourvehicle and the trailer are workingproperly.

Your vehicle tires and spare areproperly inflated, and the trailertires and spare are inflated asrecommended by the trailermaker.

Towing a Trailer

Additional Towing Equipment Pre-Tow Checklist

Driving

193

０４／０８／０５　１１：０７：１３　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０１９６　

Make turns more slowly and widerthan normal. The trailer tracks asmaller arc than your vehicle, and itcan hit or run over something thevehicle misses. Allow more time anddistance for braking. Do not brake orturn suddenly as this could cause thetrailer to jackknife or turn over.

The added weight, length, andheight of a trailer will affect yourvehicle’s handling and performance,so driving with a trailer requiressome special driving skills andtechniques.

For your safety and the safety ofothers, take time to practice drivingmaneuvers before heading for theopen road, and follow the guidelinesbelow.

Drive slower than normal in alldriving situations, and obey postedspeed limits for vehicles with trailers.Do not exceed 55 mph (88 km/h). Athigher speeds, the trailer may swayor affect vehicle handling. If youhave an automatic transmission, useD position when towing a trailer onlevel roads.

When climbing hills, closely watchyour temperature gauge. If it nearsthe red (hot) mark, turn the airconditioning off, reduce speed and, ifnecessary, pull to the side of theroad to let the engine cool.

If the automatic transmission shiftsfrequently while going up a hill, shiftto D .

If you must stop when facing uphill,use the foot brake or parking brake.Do not try to hold the vehicle inplace by pressing on the accelerator,as this can cause the automatictransmission to overheat.

When driving down hills, reduceyour speed, and shift down to 2ndgear. Do not ‘‘ride’’ the brakes, andremember, it will take longer to slowdown and stop when towing a trailer.

Crosswinds and air turbulencecaused by passing trucks can disruptyour steering and cause trailerswaying. When being passed by alarge vehicle, keep a constant speed,and steer straight ahead. Do not tryto make quick steering or brakingcorrections.

3

Towing a Trailer

Making Turns and Braking

Towing Speeds and Gears

Driving on Hills

Handling Crosswinds and Buffeting

Driving Safely With a Trailer

194

０４／０８／０５　１１：０７：２７　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０１９７　

Always drive slowly and havesomeone guide you when backing up.Grip the of the steeringwheel; then turn the wheel to the leftto get the trailer to move to the left,and turn the wheel right to move thetrailer to the right.

Follow all normal precautions whenparking, including firmly setting theparking brake and putting thetransmission in Park (automatic) orin 1st or Reverse (manual). Also,place wheel chocks at each of thetrailer’s tires.

bottom

Towing a Trailer

Backing Up

Parking

Driving

195

０４／０８／０５　１１：０７：３３　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０１９８　

196

０４／０８／０５　１１：０７：３６　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０１９９　

This section explains why it isimportant to keep your vehicle wellmaintained and how to follow basicmaintenance safety precautions.

......................Maintenance Safety . 198.................Maintenance Schedule . 199

Maintenance Schedule..................(4-cylinder Models) . 201

....................Maintenance Record . 203Maintenance Schedule

..................(6-cylinder Models) . 206....................Maintenance Record . 208

..............................Fluid Locations . 211........................Adding Engine Oil . 213

.........Changing the Oil and Filter . 214..............................Engine Coolant . 217

....................Windshield Washers . 220.......................Transmission Fluid . 221

..........Automatic Transmission . 221..............Manual Transmission . 223

................Brake and Clutch Fluid . 225....................Power Steering Fluid . 226

....................................Timing Belt . 227.............................................Lights . 228

................Cleaning the Seat Belts . 234.....................................Floor Mats . 234

..................Dust and Pollen Filter . 235.................................Wiper Blades . 236

...............................................Tires . 238...................Checking the Battery . 244

.............................Vehicle Storage . 245

This section also includesmaintenance schedules for normaldriving and severe driving conditions,a maintenance record, andinstructions for simple maintenancetasks you may want to take care ofyourself.

If you have the skills and tools toperform more complex maintenancetasks on your vehicle, you may wantto purchase the service manual. Seepage for information on how toobtain a copy, or see your dealer.

289

MaintenanceM

aintenance

197

０４／０８／０５　１１：０７：４３　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０２００　

All service items not detailed in thissection should be performed by acertified technician or other qualifiedmechanic.

To eliminate potential hazards, readthe instructions before you begin,and make sure you have the toolsand skills required.

To clean parts, use a commerciallyavailable degreaser or partscleaner, not gasoline.

Be sure there isadequate ventilation whenever youoperate the engine.

Let theengine and exhaust system coolbefore touching any parts.

Donot run the engine unlessinstructed to do so.

Some of the most important safetyprecautions are given here. However,we cannot warn you of everyconceivable hazard that can arise inperforming maintenance. Only youcan decide whether or not youshould perform a given task.

Make sure your vehicle is parkedon level ground, the parking brakeis set, and the engine is off.

To reduce the possibility of fire orexplosion, keep cigarettes, sparks,and flames away from the batteryand all fuel-related parts.

Wear eye protection andprotective clothing when workingwith the battery or compressed air.

Maintenance Safety


Potential Vehicle HazardsCarbon Monoxide poison fromengine exhaust.

Burns from hot parts.

Injury from moving parts.

198

Improperly maintaining thisvehicle, or failing to correct aproblem before driving cancause a crash in which you canbe seriously hurt or killed.

Always follow the inspectionand maintenancerecommendations andschedules in this owner’smanual.

Failure to properly followmaintenance instructions andprecautions can cause you tobe seriously hurt or killed.

Always follow the proceduresand precautions in this owner’smanual.

０４／０８／０５　１１：０７：５５　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０２０１　

－

－

The maintenance schedule assumesyou will use your vehicle as normaltransportation for passengers andtheir possessions. You should alsofollow these recommendations:

Avoid exceeding your vehicle’sload limit. This puts excess stresson the engine, brakes, and manyother vehicle parts. The load limitis shown on the tire informationlabel on the driver’s doorjamb.

Driving less than 5 miles (8 km)per trip or, in freezingtemperatures, driving less than 10miles (16 km) per trip.

Driving in extremely hot [over90°F (32°C)] conditions.

Driving on muddy, dusty, or de-iced roads.

Drive your vehicle regularly over adistance of several miles(kilometers).

Always use unleaded gasoline withthe proper octane rating (see page

).

Extensive idling or long periods ofstop and go driving, such as a taxior a commercial delivery vehicle.

Operate your vehicle onreasonable roads within the legalspeed limit.

Service your vehicle according to thetime and mileage periods on one ofthe maintenance schedules on thefollowing pages.

Follow themaintenance schedule for severeconditions if you drive your vehicleMAINLY under one or more of thefollowing conditions.

If you only OCCASIONALLYdrive under a ‘‘severe’’ condition, youshould follow the maintenanceschedule for normal conditions.

Follow themaintenance schedule for severeconditions.

Trailer towing, driving with aloaded roof rack, or driving inmountainous conditions.

160

Maintenance Schedule

Which Schedule to Follow:

U.S. Owners

Canadian Owners

Maintenance

199

NOTE:

０４／０８／０５　１１：０８：１０　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０２０２　

＃

－

－

－

－

－

－We recommend the use of Hondaparts and fluids whenever you havemaintenance done.

According to state and federalregulations, failure to performmaintenance on the items markedwith will not void your emissionswarranties. However, allmaintenance services should beperformed at the recommended timeor mileage period to ensure long-term reliability.

You should check the followingitems at the specified intervals. Ifyou are unsure of how to performany check, turn to the appropriatepage listed.

Lights Check the operation ofthe headlights, parking lights,taillights, high-mount brake light,and license plate lights monthly.See page .

Engine oil level Check everytime you fill the fuel tank. Seepage .Engine coolant level Check theradiator reserve tank every timeyou fill the fuel tank. See page .Automatic transmission Checkthe fluid level monthly. See page

.Brakes Check the fluid levelmonthly. See page .Tires Check the tire pressuremonthly. Examine the tread forwear and foreign objects. See page

.

U.S. Vehicles:Your authorized dealer knows yourvehicle best and can providecompetent, efficient service.However, service at a dealer is notmandatory to keep your warrantiesin effect. Maintenance may be doneby any qualified service facility orskilled person to keep yourwarranties in effect. Keep all thereceipts as proof of completion, andhave the person who does the workfill out the maintenance record.Check your warranty booklet formore information.

164

165

221

239

228

226

Maintenance Schedule

Servicing Your Vehicle Owner’s Maintenance ChecksMaintenance,replacement, or repair ofemissions control devices andsystems may be done by anyautomotive repair establishmentor individual using parts that are‘‘certif ied’’ to EPA standards.

200

０４／０８／０５　１１：０８：２３　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０２０３　

＃＊

＃

＃

＊

4-cylinder Models

201

miles x 1,000km x 1,000

Service the items listed at the indicated distance (or time, if given).

Check oil and coolant at each fuel stopCheck inflation and condition once a month

Every 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or every 1 year, whichever comes firstEvery 10,000 miles (16,000 km)

Every 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or every 2 years, whichever comes first

Inspect every 110,000 miles (176,000 km), otherwise adjust only if noisy

Every 120,000 miles (192,000 km) or every 6 years, whichever comes firstEvery 160,000 miles (256,000 km)

Every 3 years (independent of mileage)

Every 20,000 miles (32,000 km) or every 1 year, whichever comes first

1016

2032

3048

5080

6096

70112

80128

90144

100160

110176

120192

130208

140224

150240

Replace at 120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 6 years, then every 90,000 miles (144,000 km) or 5 years.

4064

At 120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 10 years, then every 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 5 years

Check engine oil and coolantCheck tiresReplace engine oilRotate tires (follow pattern on page 241 )Replace engine oil filterCheck front and rear brakesCheck parking brake adjustmentInspect the following items:

Tie-rod ends, steering gearbox, and bootsSuspension componentsDriveshaft bootsBrake hoses and lines (including ABS)All fluid levels and condition of fluidsExhaust systemFuel lines and connections

Inspect drive beltReplace dust and pollen filterReplace air cleaner elementReplace spark plugsInspect valve clearanceReplace automatic transmission fluidReplace manual transmission fluidInspect idle speedReplace engine coolantReplace brake fluid

See information on maintenance and emissions warranty, middle column, page .::

200

Main

tenance

Sch

edule

for

Norm

alC

onditio

ns

０４／０８／０５　１１：０８：４６　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０２０４　

＃＊＊

＃

＃

＊

＊

4-cylinder Models

202

miles x 1,000km x 1,000

Service the items listed at the indicated distance (or time, if given).


Every 10,000 miles (16,000 km)


Every 160,000 miles (256,000 km)Every 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or every 3 years, whichever comes first


Every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) (Use normal schedule except in dusty conditions)




Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or every 6 months, whichever comes first


1016

2032

3048

4064

5080

70112

80128

90144

100160

110176

120192

130208

140224

150240

6096

At 120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 10 years, then every 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 5 years

See dust and pollen filter on page for replacement information under special driving conditions.

Check engine oil and coolantCheck tiresReplace engine oilRotate tires (follow pattern on page 241 )Replace engine oil filterCheck front and rear brakesLubricate all hinges, locks and latchesInspect the following items:

Tie-rod ends, steering gearbox, and bootsSuspension componentsDriveshaft boots

Check parking brake adjustmentInspect the following items:

Brake hoses and lines (including ABS)All fluid levels and condition of fluidsExhaust systemFuel lines and connectionsLights and controls/vehicle underbody

Inspect drive beltReplace dust and pollen filterReplace air cleaner elementReplace spark plugsInspect valve clearanceReplace automatic transmission fluidReplace manual transmission fluidInspect idle speedReplace engine coolantReplace brake fluid

See information on maintenance and emissions warranty, middle column, page .:1:2:

200235

1

2

Main

tenance

Sch

edule

for

Seve

reC

onditi

ons

０４／０８／０５　１１：０９：１２　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０２０５　

(for Normal and Severe Schedules)

CONTINUED

Maintenance Record for 4-cylinder ModelsM

aintenance

203

5,000 mi

10,000 mi

15,000 mi

20,000 mi

25,000 mi

30,000 mi

35,000 mi

40,000 mi

45,000 mi

50,000 mi

You or the servicing dealer can record all completed maintenance here, whether you follow the schedule for normal conditions (page ) or severeconditions (page ). Keep the receipts for all work done on your vehicle.

8,000 km

16,000 km

24,000 km

32,000 km

40,000 km

48,000 km

56,000 km

64,000 km

72,000 km

80,000 km

Signature or dealer stamp Signature or dealer stampmi/km

Date

mi/km

mi/km

mi/km

mi/km

Date

Date

Date

Date

Date

Date

Date

Date

Date

mi/km

mi/km

mi/km

mi/km

mi/km

202201

０４／０８／０５　１１：０９：２１　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０２０６　

(for Normal and Severe Schedules)Maintenance Record for 4-cylinder Models

204

55,000 mi

60,000 mi

65,000 mi

70,000 mi

75,000 mi

80,000 mi

85,000 mi

90,000 mi

95,000 mi

100,000 mi

88,000 km

96,000 km

104,000 km

112,000 km

120,000 km

Signature or dealer stamp128,000 km

136,000 km

144,000 km

152,000 km

160,000 km

Signature or dealer stampmi/km

mi/km

mi/km

mi/km

mi/km

Date

Date

Date

Date

Date

Date

Date

Date

Date

Date

mi/km

mi/km

mi/km

mi/km

mi/km

０４／０８／０５　１１：０９：２８　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０２０７　

(for Normal and Severe Schedules)Maintenance Record for 4-cylinder ModelsM

aintenance

205

105,000 mi

110,000 mi

115,000 mi

120,000 mi

125,000 mi

130,000 mi

135,000 mi

140,000 mi

145,000 mi

150,000 mi

168,000 km

176,000 km

184,000 km

192,000 km

200,000 km

Signature or dealer stamp208,000 km

216,000 km

224,000 km

232,000 km

240,000 km

Signature or dealer stampmi/km

mi/km

mi/km

mi/km

mi/km

mi/km

mi/km

mi/km

mi/km

mi/km

Date

Date

Date

Date

Date

Date

Date

Date

Date

Date

０４／０８／０５　１１：０９：３６　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０２０８　

＃＊

＃

＃

＊

6-cylinder Models

206

Service the items listed at the indicated distance (or time, if given).miles x 1,000km x 1,000



Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or every 1 year, whichever comes firstEvery 7,500 miles (12,000 km)



4572

3048

6096

75120

90144

105168

120192

135216

150240

1524



Every 105,000 miles (168,000 km) or every 7 years, whichever comes firstAt 120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 10 years, then every 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 5 years

Every 165,000 miles (264,000 km)Every 120,000 miles (192,000 km) or every 6 years, whichever comes first

Check engine oil and coolantCheck tiresReplace engine oilRotate tires (follow pattern on page 241 )Replace engine oil filterCheck front and rear brakesCheck parking brake adjustmentInspect the following items:

Tie-rod ends, steering gearbox, and bootsSuspension componentsDriveshaft bootsBrake hoses and lines (including ABS)All fluid levels and condition of fluidsExhaust systemFuel lines and connections

Inspect drive beltReplace dust and pollen filterReplace air cleaner elementReplace spark plugsInspect valve clearanceReplace automatic transmission fluidReplace manual transmission fluidInspect idle speedReplace timing belt and inspect water pumpReplace engine coolantReplace brake fluid

See information on maintenance and emissions warranty, middle column, page .::

200

Main

tenance

Sch

edule

for

Norm

alC

onditi

ons

０４／０８／０５　１１：０９：５７　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０２０９　

＃＊＊＊

＃

＃

＊

＊

＃＊

6-cylinder Models

207

Service the items listed at the indicated distance (or time, if given).miles x 1,000km x 1,000


Every 3,750 miles (6,000 km) or every 6 months, whichever comes firstEvery 7,500 miles (12,000 km)

1524

3048

4572

75120

135216



Every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) (Use normal schedule except in dusty conditions)

105168

6096

90144

120192

Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or every 6 months, whichever comes first

See timing belt on page for replacement information under special driving conditions.Replace at 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 3 years, then every 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 2 years.See dust and pollen filter on page for replacement information under special driving conditions.

Every 3 years (independent of mileage)At 120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 10 years, then every 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 5 years

Every 105,000 miles (168,000 km) or every 7 years, whichever comes firstEvery 165,000 miles (264,000 km)


150240


Check engine oil and coolantCheck tiresReplace engine oil and oil filterRotate tires (follow pattern on page 241 )Check front and rear brakesInspect the following items:

Tie-rod ends, steering gearbox, and bootsSuspension componentsDriveshaft boots

Check parking brake adjustmentLubricate all hinges, locks and latchesInspect the following items:

Brake hoses and lines (including ABS)All fluid levels and condition of fluidsExhaust systemFuel lines and connectionsLights and controls/vehicle underbody

Inspect drive beltReplace dust and pollen filterReplace air cleaner elementReplace spark plugsInspect valve clearanceReplace automatic transmission fluidReplace manual transmission fluidInspect idle speedReplace timing belt , and inspect water pumpReplace engine coolantReplace brake fluid

See information on maintenance and emissions warranty, middle column, page .:1:2:3:

235

226

200

1

2

3

Main

tenance

Sch

edule

for

Seve

reC

onditio

ns

０４／０８／０５　１１：１０：２２　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０２１０　


208

3,750 mi

7,500 mi

11,250 mi

15,000 mi

18,750 mi

22,500 mi

26,250 mi

30,000 mi

33,750 mi

37,500 mi

41,250 mi

45,000 mi

48,750 mi

52,500 mi

56,250 mi

60,000 mi

You or the servicing dealer can record all completed maintenance here, whether you follow the schedule for normal conditions (page ) or severeconditions (page ). Keep the receipts for all work done on your vehicle.

6,000 km

12,000 km

18,000 km

24,000 km

30,000 km

36,000 km

42,000 km

48,000 km

Signature or dealer stamp mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

54,000 km

60,000 km

66,000 km

72,000 km

78,000 km

84,000 km

90,000 km

96,000 km


Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

207206

０４／０８／０５　１１：１０：３０　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０２１１　

(for Normal and Severe Schedules)

CONTINUED

Maintenance Record for 6-cylinder ModelsM

aintenance

209

63,750 mi

67,500 mi

71,250 mi

75,000 mi

78,750 mi

82,500 mi

86,250 mi

90,000 mi

93,750 mi

97,500 mi

101,250 mi

105,000 mi

108,750 mi

112,500 mi

116,250 mi

120,000 mi

102,000 km

108,000 km

114,000 km

120,000 km

126,000 km

132,000 km

138,000 km

144,000 km


Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

150,000 km

156,000 km

162,000 km

168,000 km

174,000 km

180,000 km

186,000 km

192,000 km


Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

０４／０８／０５　１１：１０：３８　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０２１２　


210

123,750 mi

127,500 mi

131,250 mi

135,000 mi

138,750 mi

142,500 mi

146,250 mi

150,000 mi

198,000 km

204,000 km

210,000 km

216,000 km

222,000 km

228,000 km

234,000 km

240,000 km


Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

０４／０８／０５　１１：１０：４２　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０２１３　

Fluid Locations

4-cylinder Models

Maintenance

211

BRAKE FLUID(Gray cap)

ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK(Orange handle)

WASHER FLUID(Blue cap)

POWER STEERINGFLUID (Red cap)

RADIATOR CAP

AUTOMATICTRANSMISSIONFLUID DIPSTICK(Yellow loop)

ENGINE OILFILL CAP

ENGINECOOLANTRESERVOIR

CLUTCH FLUID(5-speed manualtransmission only)(Light gray cap)

０４／０８／０５　１１：１０：４８　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０２１４　

Fluid Locations

6-cylinder Models

212

ENGINE OIL FILL CAP

RADIATOR CAP

ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK(Orange loop)

WASHER FLUID(Blue cap)

POWER STEERINGFLUID (Red cap)

BRAKE FLUID(Gray cap)

AUTOMATICTRANSMISSIONFLUID DIPSTICK(Yellow loop)

ENGINECOOLANTRESERVOIR

CLUTCH FLUID(Gray cap)(6-speed manualtransmission only)

０４／０８／０５　１１：１０：５４　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０２１５　

Unscrew and remove the engine oilfill cap on top of the valve cover.Pour in the oil slowly and carefully soyou do not spill. Clean up any spillsimmediately. Spilled oil coulddamage components in the enginecompartment.

Install the engine oil fill cap, andtighten it securely. Wait a fewminutes, and recheck the oil level.Do not fill above the upper mark; youcould damage the engine.

Oil is a major contributor to yourengine’s performance and longevity.Always use a premium-grade 5W-20detergent oil displaying the APICertification Seal. This seal indicatesthe oil is energy conserving, and thatit meets the American PetroleumInstitute’s latest requirements.

CONTINUED

Adding Engine Oil

Recommended Engine Oil

Maintenance

213

ENGINE OIL FILL CAP

4-cylinder models 6-cylinder modelsENGINE OIL FILL CAP API CERTIFICATION SEAL

０４／０８／０５　１１：１１：０４　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０２１６　

Honda Motor Oil is the preferred5W-20 lubricant for your vehicle. It ishighly recommended that you useHonda Motor Oil in your vehicle foroptimum engine protection. Makesure the API Certification Seal says‘‘For Gasoline Engines.’’

You may use a synthetic motor oil ifit meets the same requirementsgiven for a conventional motor oil: itdisplays the API Certification Seal,and it is the proper weight. You mustfollow the oil and filter changeintervals given on the maintenanceschedule.

Your vehicle does not require any oiladditives. Additives may adverselyaffect your engine’s or transmission’sperformance and durability.

Always change the oil and filteraccording to the recommendations inthe maintenance schedule. The oiland filter collect contaminants thatcan damage your engine if they arenot removed regularly.

Changing the oil and filter requiresspecial tools and access fromunderneath the vehicle. The vehicleshould be raised on a service station-type hydraulic lift for this service.Unless you have the knowledge andproper equipment, you should havethis maintenance done by a skilledmechanic.

Run the engine until it reachesnormal operating temperature,then shut it off.The oil viscosity or weight is

provided on the container’s label.5W-20 oil is formulated for year-round protection of your vehicle toimprove cold weather starting andfuel economy.

1.

Adding Engine Oil, Changing the Oil and Filter

Synthetic Oil

Engine Oil Additives

Changing the Oil and Filter

214

Ambient Temperature

０４／０８／０５　１１：１１：１５　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０２１７　

Install a new oil filter according tothe instructions that come with it.

Open the hood, and remove theengine oil fill cap. Remove the oildrain bolt and washer from thebottom of the engine. Drain the oilinto an appropriate container.

Remove the oil filter, and let theremaining oil drain. A specialwrench (available from yourdealer) is required. Make sure to clean off any dirt

and dust on the connectingsurface of a new oil filter.

4.3.2.

CONTINUED

Changing the Oil and FilterM

aintenance

215

4-cylinder models

OIL DRAIN BOLT OIL DRAIN BOLTWASHER OIL FILTER

4-cylinder models6-cylinder models

WASHER

０４／０８／０５　１１：１１：２６　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０２１８　

(4-cylinder models)

(6-cylinder models)

Refill the engine with therecommended oil.

Engine oil change capacity(including filter):

(4-cylinder models)

(6-cylinder models)

Replace the engine oil fill cap.Start the engine. The oil pressureindicator should go out within 5seconds. If it does not, turn off theengine, and check your work.

Let the engine run for severalminutes, then check the drain boltand oil filter for leaks.

Turn off the engine and let it sitfor several minutes, then checkthe oil level on the dipstick. Ifnecessary, add more oil.

Put a new washer on the drain bolt,then reinstall the drain bolt.Tighten the drain bolt to :

9.

8.

7.

6.

5.

Changing the Oil and Filter

216

OIL FILTER

6-cylinder models

4.4 US qt (4.2 )

4.5 US qt (4.3 )

33 lbf·ft (44 N·m , 4.5 kgf·m)

29 lbf·ft (39 N·m , 4.0 kgf·m)

Improper disposal of engine oil can beharmf ul to the environment. If youchange your own oil, please dispose ofthe used oil properly. Put it in a sealedcontainer and take it to a recyclingcenter. Do not discard it in a trash binor dump it on the ground.

０４／０８／０５　１１：１１：３９　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０２１９　

Always use Honda All SeasonAntifreeze/Coolant Type 2. Thiscoolant is pre-mixed with 50 percentantifreeze and 50 percent water.Never add straight antifreeze orplain water.

If Honda antifreeze/coolant is notavailable, you may use anothermajor-brand non-silicate coolant as atemporary replacement. Make sure itis a high-quality coolant

recommended for aluminum engines.Continued use of any non-Hondacoolant can result in corrosion,causing the cooling system tomalfunction or fail. Have the coolingsystem flushed and refilled withHonda antifreeze/coolant as soon aspossible.

If the reserve tank is completelyempty, you should also check thecoolant level in the radiator.

If the coolant level in the reservetank is at or below the MIN line, addcoolant to bring it up to the MAX line.Inspect the cooling system for leaks.

CONTINUED

Engine Coolant

Adding Engine Coolant

Maintenance

217

6-cylinder models RESERVE TANK4-cylinder models RESERVE TANK

Removing the radiator capwhile the engine is hot cancause the coolant to spray out,seriously scalding you.

Always let the engine andradiator cool down beforeremoving the radiator cap.

０４／０８／０５　１１：１１：４８　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０２２０　

When the radiator and engine arecool, relieve any pressure in thecooling system by turning theradiator cap counterclockwise,without pressing down.

Remove the radiator cap bypushing down and turningcounterclockwise.

The coolant level should be up tothe base of the filler neck. Addcoolant if it is low.

Pour coolant into the reserve tank.Fill it to halfway between the MAXand MIN marks. Put the cap backon the reserve tank.

Put the radiator cap back on, andtighten it fully.

Pour the coolant slowly andcarefully so you do not spill. Cleanup any spill immediately; it coulddamage components in the enginecompartment.

4.

5.1.

2.

3.

Engine Coolant

218

RESERVE TANK4-cylinder models 6-cylinder models 4-cylinder modelsRADIATOR CAP

RADIATOR CAP

０４／０８／０５　１１：１１：５８　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０２２１　

Do not add any rust inhibitors orother additives to your vehicle’scooling system. They may not becompatible with the coolant orengine components.

Engine CoolantM

aintenance

219

6-cylinder models RESERVE TANK

０４／０８／０５　１１：１２：０２　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０２２２　

Check the fluid level in thewindshield washer reservoir at leastmonthly during normal use.

Check the reservoir’s fluid level byremoving the cap and looking at thelevel gauge attached to the cap.

Fill the reservoir with a good-qualitywindshield washer fluid. Thisincreases the cleaning capability andprevents freezing in cold weather.

When you refill the reservoir, cleanthe edges of the windshield wiperblades with windshield washer fluidon a clean cloth. This will help tocondition them.

The low washerlevel indicator comes on when thelevel is low (see page ).61

On Canadian models:

Windshield Washers

220

LEVEL GAUGE


LEVEL GAUGE

Do not use engine antif reeze or avinegar/water solution in thewindshield washer reservoir. Antif reezecan damage your vehicle’s paint, whilea vinegar/water solution can damagethe windshield washer pump. Use onlycommercially-available windshieldwasher f luid.

０４／０８／０５　１１：１２：１１　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０２２３　

4-cylinder models

Check the fluid level with the engineat normal operating temperature.

Park the vehicle on level ground.Shut off the engine.

Remove the dipstick (yellow loop)from the transmission, and wipe itwith a clean cloth.

Insert the dipstick all the way intothe transmission securely asshown in the illustration.

Remove the dipstick and checkthe fluid level. It should bebetween the upper and lowermarks.

If the level is below the lowermark, add fluid into the dipsticktube to bring it to the upper mark.

Make sure the notch in the rubbercap fits in the dipstick guide andthat you push the dipstick in allthe way.

Pour the fluid slowly and carefullyso you do not spill any. Clean upany spills immediately; it coulddamage components in the enginecompartment.

Always use Honda ATF-Z1(Automatic Transmission Fluid). Ifit’s not available, you may use aDEXRON III automatictransmission fluid as a temporaryreplacement. However, continueduse can affect the shift quality.Have the transmission flushed andrefilled with Honda ATF-Z1 assoon as it is convenient.

1.

2.

3.

5.

4.

CONTINUED

Transmission Fluid


Maintenance

221

DIPSTICK

UPPER MARK

LOWER MARK

DIPSTICKGUIDE

０４／０８／０５　１１：１２：２４　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０２２４　

To thoroughly flush the transmission,the technician should drain and refillit with Honda ATF-Z1, then drive thevehicle for a short distance. Do thisthree times. Then drain and refill thetransmission a final time.

Insert the dipstick all the way backinto the transmission securely asshown in the illustration.

Check the fluid level with the engineat normal operating temperature.

Park the vehicle on level ground.Shut off the engine.

Remove the dipstick (yellow loop)from the transmission, and wipe itwith a clean cloth.

Insert the dipstick all the way intothe transmission securely asshown in the illustration.

Make sure the notch in the rubbercap fits in the dipstick guide andthat you push the dipstick in allthe way.

If you are not sure how to add fluid,contact your dealer.

The transmission should be drainedand refilled with new fluid accordingto the time and distance recommen-dations in the maintenance schedule.

Make sure the notch fits in thedipstick guide and the dipstick isdown all the way.

1.

2.

6.

3.

6-cylinder models

Transmission Fluid


222

DIPSTICK

UPPER MARK

LOWER MARK

０４／０８／０５　１１：１２：３７　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０２２５　

Remove the dipstick and checkthe fluid level. It should bebetween the upper and lowermarks.

If the level is below the lowermark, remove the fill plug and addfluid to bring it to the upper mark.

Always use Honda ATF-Z1(Automatic Transmission Fluid). Ifit’s not available, you may use aDEXRON III automatictransmission fluid as a temporaryreplacement. However, continueduse can affect the shift quality.Have the transmission flushed andrefilled with Honda ATF-Z1 assoon as it is convenient.

To thoroughly flush the transmission,the technician should drain and refillit with Honda ATF-Z1, then drive thevehicle for a short distance. Do thisthree times. Then drain and refill thetransmission a final time.

Insert the dipstick all the way backinto the transmission securely asshown in the illustration.

Make sure the notch fits in thedipstick guide and the dipstick isdown all the way.


If you are not sure how to add fluid,contact your dealer.

Check the fluid level with thetransmission at normal operatingtemperature and the vehiclesitting on level ground. Removethe transmission filler bolt, andcarefully feel inside the bolt holewith your finger.

Pour the fluid slowly and carefullyso you do not spill any. Clean upany spill immediately; it coulddamage components in the enginecompartment.

5.

6.

4.

CONTINUED

On 4-cylinder models

Transmission Fluid

Manual Transmission

Maintenance

223

FILLER BOLT

Correct level

０４／０８／０５　１１：１２：５０　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０２２６　

The fluid level should be up to theedge of the bolt hole. If it is not, addHonda Manual Transmission Fluid(MTF) until it starts to run out of thehole. Reinstall the filler bolt, andtighten it securely.

If Honda MTF is not available, youmay use an SAE 10W-30 or 10W-40viscosity motor oil with the APICertification seal that says ‘‘FORGASOLINE ENGINES’’ as atemporary replacement. However,motor oil does not contain the properadditives, and continued use cancause stiffer shifting. Replace assoon as it is convenient.


If you are not sure how to check andadd fluid, contact your dealer.

Check the fluid level with thetransmission at normal operatingtemperature and the vehicle sittingon level ground.

Remove the check bolt and look fortransmission fluid coming out of thebolt hole. If a small amount of fluiddrips out of the bolt hole, reinstallthe check bolt.

If no fluid comes out, remove thefiller bolt. Slowly add Honda ManualTransmission Fluid (MTF) until itstarts to run out of the check bolthole. Let the fluid run out until itstops, then reinstall the check boltand the filler bolt.

On EX-V6 model

Transmission Fluid

Manual Transmission

224

CHECK BOLT

WASHER

DRAIN BOLT

FILLER BOLT

WASHER

０４／０８／０５　１１：１３：００　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０２２７　

Always use Honda Heavy DutyBrake Fluid DOT 3. If it is notavailable, you should use only DOT 3or DOT 4 fluid, from a sealedcontainer, as a temporaryreplacement.

Using any non-Honda brake fluid cancause corrosion and decrease the lifeof the system. Have the brakesystem flushed and refilled withHonda Heavy Duty Brake FluidDOT 3 as soon as possible.

Brake fluid marked DOT 5 is notcompatible with your vehicle’sbraking system and can causeextensive damage.

Check the fluid level in thereservoirs monthly. There are up totwo reservoirs, depending on themodel. They are:

If Honda MTF is not available, youmay use an SAE 10W-30 or 10W-40viscosity motor oil with the APICertification seal that says ‘‘FORGASOLINE ENGINES’’ as atemporary replacement. However,motor oil does not contain the properadditives, and continued use cancause stiffer shifting. Replace assoon as it is convenient.


If you are not sure how to check andadd fluid, contact your dealer.

Pour the fluid into the filler holeslowly and carefully so you do notspill. Clean up any spill immediately;it could damage components in theengine compartment.

Replace the brake fluid according tothe time recommendation in themaintenance schedule.

Brake fluid reservoir (all models)

Clutch fluid reservoir(manual transmission only)

Transmission Fluid, Brake and Clutch Fluid

Brake and Clutch Fluid

Maintenance

225

０４／０８／０５　１１：１３：１０　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０２２８　

Check the level on the side of thereservoir when the engine is cold.The fluid should be between theUPPER LEVEL and LOWER LEVEL.If not, add power steering fluid to theUPPER LEVEL mark.

The fluid level should be betweenthe MIN and MAX marks on the sideof the reservoir. If it is not, addbrake fluid to bring it up to that level.Use the same fluid specified for thebrake system.

A low fluid level can indicate a leakin the clutch system. Have thissystem inspected as soon as possible.

The fluid level should be betweenthe MIN and MAX marks on the sideof the reservoir. If the level is at orbelow the MIN mark, your brakesystem needs attention. Have thebrake system inspected for leaks orworn brake pads.

Power Steering FluidClutch SystemBrake System

Brake and Clutch Fluid, Power Steering Fluid

226

UPPER LEVELMAX

MIN4-cylinder models LOWER LEVEL

MAX

MIN

０４／０８／０５　１１：１３：２０　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０２２９　

－－

The timing belt should be replacedat the intervals shown in themaintenance schedule.

Replace the belt at 60,000 miles (U.S.)or 100,000 km (Canada) if youregularly drive your vehicle in one ormore of these conditions:

Always use Honda Power SteeringFluid. You may use another powersteering fluid as an emergencyreplacement, but have the powersteering system flushed and refilledwith Honda PSF as soon as possible.

A low power steering fluid level canindicate a leak in the system. Checkthe fluid level frequently, and havethe system inspected as soon aspossible. In very high temperatures

(over 110°F, 43°C).

In very low temperatures(under 20°F, 29°C).

If you frequently tow a trailer.

Pour the fluid slowly and carefully soyou do not spill. Clean up any spillimmediately; it could damagecomponents in the enginecompartment.

6-cylinder models onlyTiming Belt

Power Steering Fluid, Timing BeltM

aintenance

227

UPPER LEVEL

LOWER LEVEL6-cylinder models

Turning the steering wheel to f ull lef tor right lock and holding it there candamage the power steering pump.

０４／０８／０５　１１：１３：３２　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０２３０　

Open the hood. To change a bulbon the passenger’s side, undo thetwo fasteners and remove the airintake cover.

The headlights were properly aimedwhen your vehicle was new. If youregularly carry heavy items in thetrunk or pull a trailer, readjustmentmay be required. Adjustmentsshould be done by your dealer orother qualified mechanic.

Your vehicle has halogen headlightbulbs. When replacing a bulb, handleit by its base, and protect the glassfrom contact with your skin or hardobjects. If you touch the glass, cleanit with denatured alcohol and a cleancloth.

1.

Headlight Aiming Replacing a Headlight Bulb High Beam Headlight

Lights

228

4-cylinder models

FASTENERS AIR INTAKECOVER

Halogen headlight bulbs get very hotwhen lit. Oil, perspiration, or a scratchon the glass can cause the bulb tooverheat and shatter.

０４／０８／０５　１１：１３：４１　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０２３１　

Remove the electrical connectorfrom the bulb by squeezing theconnector to unlock the tab, thenslide the connector off the bulb.

Remove the bulb by turning itapproximately one-quarter turncounterclockwise.

Install the new bulb and turn itone-quarter turn clockwise to lockit in place.

Push the electrical connector backonto the bulb. Make sure it is onall the way.

Turn on the headlights to test thenew bulb.

(Passenger’s side)Reinstall the air intake cover.Reinstall the two fasteners andsecure them by pushing on theheads until they lock.

3.

2.

4.

5.

6.

7.

CONTINUED

LightsM

aintenance

229

6-cylinder models

AIR INTAKECOVER

FASTENERS

4-cylinder models

6-cylinder models

TAB BULB

TABBULB

０４／０８／０５　１１：１３：５３　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０２３２　

Remove the electrical connectorfrom the bulb by squeezing theconnector to unlock the tab, thenslide the connector off the bulb.

Remove the bulb by turning itapproximately one-quarter turncounterclockwise.

To change the passenger’s sidebulb, start the engine, turn thesteering wheel all the way to theleft, and turn off the engine. Tochange the driver’s side bulb, turnthe steering wheel to the right.

Use a flat-tipped screwdriver toremove the two holding clips fromthe inner fender.

Pull the inner fender cover awayfrom the fender and bumper.

To change the low beam headlightbulb on the driver’s side, removethe air intake duct. You can reachthe air intake duct from the backside of the inner fender.

6.

5.4.

1.

2.

3.

On EX-V6 model with manualtransmission

Lights

Low Beam Headlight

230

AIR INTAKE DUCT

EX-V6 with M/T

HOLDING CLIPS

０４／０８／０５　１１：１４：０４　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０２３３　

Pull the inner fender cover awayfrom the fender and bumper.

Remove the socket from theheadlight assembly by turning itone-quarter turn counterclockwise.

To change the passenger’s sidebulb, start the engine, turn thesteering wheel all the way to theleft, and turn off the engine. Tochange the driver’s side bulb, turnthe steering wheel to the right.

Install the new bulb and turn itone-quarter turn clockwise to lockit in place.

Push the electrical connector backonto the bulb. Make sure it is onall the way.

Turn on the headlights to test thenew bulb.

Reinstall the air intake ductsecurely.

Put the inner fender cover in place.Install and lock each holding clipby pushing on the center.

Use a flat-tipped screwdriver toremove the two holding clips fromthe inner fender.

1.

3.

2.

4.

9.

7.

8.

10.

11.

CONTINUED

On EX-V6 model with manualtransmission

Lights

Replacing a Front Turn Signal/Parking/Side Marker Light Bulb

Maintenance

231

HOLDING CLIPS

０４／０８／０５　１１：１４：１６　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０２３４　

Remove the burned out bulb fromthe socket by pushing it in andturning the bulb counterclockwiseuntil it unlocks.

Install the new bulb in the socket.Turn it clockwise to lock it in place.

Insert the socket back into theheadlight assembly. Turn itclockwise to lock it in place.

Turn on the lights to make surethe new bulb is working.

Put the inner fender cover in place.Install and lock each holding clipby pushing on the center.

Open the trunk.

Remove the light assembly coverby pulling its outside edge.

Determine which of the threebulbs is burned out: stop/taillight/side marker, back-up or turnsignal.

Remove the socket by turning itone-quarter turn counterclockwise.

Pull the bulb straight out of itssocket. Push the new bulb straightinto the socket until it bottoms.

Reinstall the socket into the lightassembly by turning it clockwiseuntil it locks.


Install the light assembly cover.Make sure it snaps into place.

1.

3.

2.

4.

5.

6.

7.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

Lights

Replacing Rear Bulbs

232

COVER

０４／０８／０５　１１：１４：２９　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０２３５　

Open the trunk and remove thesocket from the light assembly byturning it one-quarter turn counter-clockwise.

Remove the burned-out bulb bypulling it straight out of the socket.Install the new bulb into thesocket.

Reinstall the socket. Turn itclockwise until it locks.


1.

2.

3.

4.

Lights

Replacing a High-mount BrakeLight Bulb

Maintenance

233

BULBSOCKET

０４／０８／０５　１１：１４：３９　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０２３６　

Dirt build-up in the loops of the seatbelt anchors can cause the belts toretract slowly. Wipe the insides ofthe loops with a clean clothdampened in mild soap and warmwater or isopropyl alcohol.

If your seat belts get dirty, use a softbrush with a mixture of mild soapand warm water to clean them. Donot use bleach, dye, or cleaningsolvents. Let the belts air dry beforeyou use the vehicle.

The driver’s and the right-rearpassenger’s floor mats that camewith your vehicle hook over the floormat anchors. This keeps the floormat from sliding forward andpossibly interfering with the pedalsor making the front passenger’sweight sensors ineffective.

If you remove the floor mats, makesure to re-anchor them when you putthem back in your vehicle.

Floor MatsCleaning the Seat Belts

Cleaning the Seat Belts, Floor Mats

234

LOOP

０４／０８／０５　１１：１４：４７　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０２３７　

This filter removes the dust andpollen that is brought in from theoutside through the heating andcooling system/climate controlsystem.

This filter should be replaced every30,000 miles (48,000 km) undernormal conditions. It should bereplaced every 15,000 miles (24,000km) if you drive primarily in urbanareas that have high concentrationsof soot in the air from industry anddiesel-powered vehicles. Replace itmore often if airflow from theheating and cooling system/climatecontrol system becomes less thanusual. Have the dust and pollen filterreplaced by your dealer.

If you use non-Honda floor mats,make sure they fit properly and thatthey can be used with the floor matanchors. Do not put additional floormats on top of an anchored mat.

Make sure the right-rear floor mat isproperly hooked to the floor matanchor. Your vehicle is equippedwith front passenger’s seat weightsensors. If the right-rear passenger’sfloor mat is on the seat rail of thefront passenger’s seat, the sensorswill detect the decreased weight onthe seat and they may not workproperly.

Floor Mats, Dust and Pollen Filter

Dust and Pollen Filter

Maintenance

235

０４／０８／０５　１１：１４：５３　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０２３８　

To replace a wiper blade:

Raise the wiper arm off thewindshield. Raise the driver’s sidefirst, then the passenger’s side.

Disconnect the blade assemblyfrom the wiper arm by pushing inthe lock tab. Hold the lock tab inwhile you push the blade assemblytoward the base of the arm.

Check the condition of the wiperblades at least every six months.Replace them if you find signs ofcracking in the rubber, areas that aregetting hard, or if they leave streaksand unwiped areas when used.

2.

1.

Wiper Blades

236

WIPER ARMS

LOCK TAB

Do not open the hood when the wiperarms are raised, or you will damage thehood and the wiper arms.

０４／０８／０５　１１：１５：０１　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０２３９　

Remove the blade from its holderby grasping the tabbed end of theblade. Pull firmly until the tabscome out of the holder.

Examine the new wiper blades. Ifthey have no plastic or metalreinforcement along the backedge, remove the metalreinforcement strips from the oldwiper blade, and install them inthe slots along the edge of the newblade.

Slide the new wiper blade into theholder until the tabs lock.

Slide the wiper blade assemblyonto the wiper arm. Make sure itlocks in place.

Lower the wiper arm down againstthe windshield. Lower thepassenger’s side first, then thedriver’s side.

3. 4.

5.

6.

7.

Wiper BladesM

aintenance

237

BLADE

BLADE

REINFORCEMENT

０４／０８／０５　１１：１５：１１　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０２４０　

To safely operate your vehicle, yourtires must be the proper type andsize, in good condition with adequatetread, and correctly inflated.

The following pages give moredetailed information on how to takecare of your tires and what to dowhen they need to be replaced.

Keeping the tires properly inflatedprovides the best combination ofhandling, tread life, and ridingcomfort.

Underinflated tires wear unevenly,adversely affect handling and fueleconomy, and are more likely tofail from being overheated.

Overinflated tires can make yourvehicle ride more harshly, aremore prone to damage from roadhazards, and wear unevenly.

We recommend that you visuallycheck your tires every day. If youthink a tire might be low, check itimmediately with a tire gauge.

Use a gauge to measure the airpressure in each tire at least once amonth. Even tires that are in goodcondition may lose one to two psi (10to 20 kPa, 0.1 to 0.2 kgf/cm ) permonth. Remember to check thespare tire at the same time.

Check the air pressure when thetires are cold. This means thevehicle has been parked for at leastthree hours, or driven less than 1mile (1.6 km). Add or release air, ifneeded, to match the recommendedcold tire pressures on page .239

Inflation Guidelines

Tires

238

Using tires that are excessivelyworn or improperly inflated cancause a crash in which you canbe seriously hurt or killed.

Follow all instructions in thisowner’s manual regarding tireinflation and maintenance.

０４／０８／０５　１１：１５：２１　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０２４１　

＊＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

You should use your own tirepressure gauge whenever you checkyour tire pressures. This will make iteasier for you to tell if a pressureloss is due to a tire problem and notdue to a variation between gauges.

While tubeless tires have someability to self-seal if they arepunctured, you should look closelyfor punctures if a tire starts losingpressure.

For convenience, the recommendedcold air pressures and tire sizes areon a label on the driver’s doorjamb.

For additional information aboutyour tires, see page .

The following chart shows therecommended cold tire pressures formost normal and high-speed drivingconditions.

If you check air pressure when thetires are hot [driven for several miles(kilometers)], you will see readings 4to 6 psi (30 to 40 kPa, 0.3 to 0.4kgf/cm ) higher than the coldreadings. This is normal. Do not letair out to match the recommendedcold air pressure. The tire will beunderinflated.

280

Cold Tire PressureTire Size/Type

Compact SpareTire Size/Type

Compact Spare

Cold Tire Pressure

Front:

Rear:

Front:

Rear:

EX-V6 with M/TEX, LX-V6 and EX-V6 with A/T1

2

4-cylinder LX model

All models except 4-cylinder LX

Tires

Recommended Tire Pressures

Maintenance

239

P205/65R15 92H30 psi (210 kPa ,2.1 kgf/cm )

29 psi (200 kPa ,2.0 kgf/cm )

P205/60R16 91VP215/50R17 93V

32 psi (220 kPa ,2.2 kgf/cm )

30 psi (210 kPa ,2.1 kgf/cm )29 psi (200 kPa ,2.0 kgf/cm )60 psi (420 kPa ,4.2 kgf/cm )

60 psi (420 kPa ,4.2 kgf/cm )

1

2

1

2

０４／０８／０５　１１：１５：３５　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０２４２　

Every time you check inflation, youshould also examine the tires fordamage, foreign objects, and wear.

You should look for:Bumps or bulges in the tread orside of the tire. Replace the tire ifyou find either of these conditions.

Cuts, splits, or cracks in the sideof the tire. Replace the tire if youcan see fabric or cord.

Excessive tread wear.

In addition to proper inflation,correct wheel alignment helps todecrease tire wear. If you find a tireis worn unevenly, have your dealercheck the wheel alignment.

Have your dealer check the tires ifyou feel a consistent vibration whiledriving. A tire should always berebalanced if it is removed from thewheel. When you have new tiresinstalled, make sure they arebalanced. This increases ridingcomfort and tire life. For best results,have the installer perform a dynamicbalance.

Your tires have wear indicatorsmolded into the tread. When thetread wears down, you will see aband 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) wide acrossthe tread. This shows there is lessthan 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread lefton the tire.

A tire this worn gives very littletraction on wet roads. You shouldreplace the tire if you can see threeor more tread wear indicators.

For vehicles equipped with aluminumwheels:

Tire Inspection Tire Maintenance

Tires

240

INDICATOR LOCATION MARKS

TREAD WEAR INDICATORS

Improper wheel weights can damageyour vehicle’s aluminum wheels. Useonly Honda wheel weights f orbalancing.

０４／０８／０５　１１：１５：５５　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０２４３　

To help increase tire life anddistribute wear more evenly, rotatethe tires every 10,000 miles(16,000 km) on 4-cylinder modelsand 7,500 miles (12,000 km) on6-cylinder models. Move the tires tothe positions shown in the chart eachtime they are rotated. If youpurchase directional tires, rotateonly front-to-back.

It is best to replace all four tires atthe same time. If that is not possibleor necessary, replace the two fronttires or two rear tires as a pair.Replacing just one tire can seriouslyaffect your vehicle’s handling.

Replace your tires with radial tires ofthe same size, load range, speedrating, and maximum cold tirepressure rating (as shown on thetire’s sidewall).

Mixing radial and bias-ply tires onyour vehicle can reduce brakingability, traction, and steeringaccuracy. Using tires of a differentsize or construction can cause theABS to work inconsistently.

The ABS works by comparing thespeed of the wheels. When replacingtires, use the same size originallysupplied with the vehicle. Tire sizeand construction can affect wheelspeed and may cause the system towork.

If you ever replace a wheel, makesure that the wheel’s specificationsmatch those of the original wheels.

Replacement wheels are available atyour dealer.

Tire Rotation Replacing Tires and Wheels

TiresM

aintenance

241

(For Non-directionalTires and Wheels)

Front

(For DirectionalTires and Wheels)

Front

Installing improper tires on yourvehicle can affect handling andstability. This can cause a crashin which you can be seriouslyhurt or killed.

Always use the size and type oftires recommended in thisowner’s manual.

０４／０８／０５　１１：１６：０６　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０２４４　

＋ If you mount snow tires on yourvehicle, make sure they are radialtires of the same size and load rangeas original tires. Mount snow tires onall four wheels. The tractionprovided by snow tires on dry roadsmay be lower than your original tires.Check with the tire dealer formaximum speed recommendations.

Tires marked ‘‘M S’’ or ‘‘AllSeason’’ on the sidewall have an all-weather tread design suitable formost winter driving conditions.

For the best performance in snowyor icy conditions, you should installsnow tires or tire chains. They maybe required by local laws undercertain conditions.

Wheels:

Tires:

See page for information aboutDOT Tire Quality Grading, and page

for tire size and labelinginformation.

278

280

LX model

LX model

EX, LX-V6 and EX-V6 with A/T models

EX-V6 with M/T model

EX, LX-V6 and EX-V6 with A/T models

EX-V6 with M/T model

Tires

Snow TiresWinter DrivingWheel and Tire Specifications

242

15 x 6 1/2 JJ

16 x 6 1/2 JJ

17 x 7 JJ

P205/65R15 92H

P215/50R17 93V

P205/60R16 91V

０４／０８／０５　１１：１６：１６　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０２４５　

These chains are the only ones thathave been approved by Honda foruse on your vehicle. Since Hondacannot test all chains, you must bepersonally responsible for properselection, installation, and use ofsnow chains.Because your vehicle has limited tire

clearance, Honda stronglyrecommends using the chains listedbelow, made by Security ChainCompany (SCC).

If you ever hear the chainscontacting the body or chassis, stopand investigate. If the chains haveloosened, retighten them. Make surethey do not contact the brake linesor suspension.

Remove the chains as soon as youbegin driving on cleared roads.

The chains listed here are availableat many auto supply stores. For acomplete list of stores, visit the SCCwebsite at www.scc-chain.com.When installing chains, follow themanufacturer’s instructions, andmount them as tightly as you can.Drive slowly with chains installed.

Mount snow chains on your tireswhen required by driving conditionsor local laws. Install them only on thefront tires.

Cable-types: SCC Radial ChainCH2311T or SCC SC Cable SC1030

Link-type: SCC Quick Grip QG1134Cable-types: SCC Radial ChainCH2311T or SCC SC Cable SC1030

Cable-types: CH2412TEX-V6 with manual transmission

LX

EX, LX-V6 and EX-V6 with automatictransmission

Tires

Tire Chains

Maintenance

243

Using the wrong chains, or notproperly installing chains, candamage the brake lines andcause a crash in which you canbe seriously injured or killed.

Follow all instructions in thisowner’s manual regarding theselection and use of tire chains.

０４／０８／０５　１１：１６：２６　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０２４６　

Check the condition of the batterymonthly by looking at the testindicator window. The label on thebattery explains the test indicator’scolors.

Check the terminals for corrosion (awhite or yellowish powder). Toremove it, cover the terminals with asolution of baking soda and water. Itwill bubble up and turn brown. Whenthis stops, wash it off with plainwater. Dry off the battery with acloth or paper towel. Coat theterminals with grease to help preventfuture corrosion.

If additional battery maintenance isneeded, see your dealer or aqualified technician.

Battery posts,terminals, and related accessoriescontain lead and lead compounds.

WARNING:

Wash your hands after handling.

Checking the Battery

244

TEST INDICATOR WINDOW


TEST INDICATOR WINDOW

０４／０８／０５　１１：１６：３４　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０２４７　

－

If you need to connect the battery toa charger, disconnect both cables toprevent damaging your vehicle’selectrical system. Always disconnectthe negative ( ) cable first, andreconnect it last.

If you need to park your vehicle foran extended period (more than onemonth), there are several things youshould do to prepare it for storage.Proper preparation helps preventdeterioration and makes it easier toget your vehicle back on the road. Ifpossible, store your vehicle indoors.

Fill the fuel tank.

Change the engine oil and filter.

Wash and dry the exteriorcompletely.

Clean the interior. Make sure thecarpeting, floor mats, etc., arecompletely dry.

CONTINUED

Vehicle Storage

Checking the Battery, Vehicle StorageM

aintenance

245

The battery gives off explosivehydrogen gas during normaloperation.

A spark or flame can cause thebattery to explode with enoughforce to kill or seriously hurt you.

Wear protective clothing and aface shield, or have a skilledmechanic do the batterymaintenance.

０４／０８／０５　１１：１６：４３　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０２４８　

Leave the parking brake off. Putthe transmission in Reverse(manual) or Park (automatic).

Block the rear wheels.

If the vehicle is to be stored for alonger period, it should besupported on jackstands so thetires are off the ground.

Leave one window open slightly (ifthe vehicle is being storedindoors).

Disconnect the battery.

Support the front wiper bladearms with a folded towel or rag sothey do not touch the windshield.

To minimize sticking, apply asilicone spray lubricant to all doorand trunk seals. Also, apply avehicle body wax to the paintedsurfaces that mate with the doorand trunk seals.

Cover the vehicle with a‘‘breathable’’ cover, one madefrom a porous material such ascotton. Non-porous materials, suchas plastic sheeting, trap moisture,which can damage the paint.

If possible, periodically run theengine until it reaches fulloperating temperature (thecooling fan cycles twice).Preferably, do this once a month.

If you store your vehicle for 1 year orlonger, have your dealer perform themaintenance inspections as soon asyou take it out of storage (see pages

and ). The 6-cylinder modelneeds the inspections called for inthe 2 years/30,000 miles (48,000 km)maintenance schedule (normalconditions) and the 4-cylinder modelneeds the inspections called for inthe 2 years/40,000 miles (64,000 km)maintenance schedule (normalnonditions). The replacements calledfor in the maintenance schedule arenot needed unless the vehicle hasactually reached that time or mileage.

201 206

Vehicle Storage

Maintenance246

０４／０８／０５　１１：１６：５３　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０２４９　

This section covers the morecommon problems that motoristsexperience with their vehicles. Itgives you information about how tosafely evaluate the problem and whatto do to correct it. If the problem hasstranded you on the side of the road,you may be able to get going again.If not, you will also find instructionson getting your vehicle towed.

......................Compact Spare Tire . 248....................Changing a Flat Tire . 249

.............If the Engine Won’t Start . 254................................Jump Starting . 256

..............If the Engine Overheats . 258.........Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 260..........Charging System Indicator . 260

.......Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 261...............Brake System Indicator . 262

..................Closing the Moonroof . 263..............................................Fuses . 264

..............................Fuse Locations . 267......................Emergency Towing . 269

Taking Care of the UnexpectedTaking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

247

０４／０８／０５　１１：１６：５８　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０２５０　

Use the compact spare tire as atemporary replacement only. Getyour regular tire repaired or replaced,and put it back on your vehicle assoon as you can.

Follow these precautions:

Do not use your compact sparetire on another vehicle unless it isthe same make and model.

Do not use the compact spare tireif you are towing a trailer.

Turn off the TCS (see page ).Driving with the compact sparetire may activate the TCS.

Replace the tire when you can seethe tread wear indicator bars. Thereplacement should be the same sizeand design tire, mounted on thesame wheel. The spare tire is notdesigned to be mounted on a regularwheel, and the spare wheel is notdesigned for mounting a regular tire.

Check the inflation pressure of thecompact spare tire every time youcheck the other tires. It should beinflated to:

Never exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).

This tire gives a harsher ride andless traction on some road sur-faces. Use greater caution whiledriving.

Do not mount snow chains on thecompact spare tire.

187On all V6 models

Compact Spare Tire

248

INDICATOR LOCATION MARK

TREAD WEAR INDICATOR BAR60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )

０４／０８／０５　１１：１７：１０　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０２５１　

CONTINUED

If you have a flat tire while driving,stop in a safe place to change it.Drive slowly along the shoulder untilyou get to an exit or an area that isfar away from the traffic lanes.

If you are towing a trailer, unhitchthe trailer.

Turn on the hazard warningindicators, and turn the ignitionswitch to LOCK (0). Have all thepassengers get out of the vehiclewhile you change the tire.

The tools are in the trunk. Openthe trunk and raise the trunk floorby lifting up on the back edge.

Take the tool kit out of the trunk.

Unscrew the wing bolt and takethe spare tire out of its well.

Park the vehicle on firm, level andnon-slippery ground. Put thetransmission in Park (A/T) orReverse (M/T). Apply the parkingbrake.

5.

4.

3.

2.

1.

Changing a Flat TireTaking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

249

TRUNK FLOOR

SPARE TIRE JACKTOOL KIT

The vehicle can easily roll offthe jack, seriously injuringanyone underneath.

Follow the directions forchanging a tire exactly, andnever get under the vehiclewhen it is supported only by thejack.

０４／０８／０５　１１：１７：２０　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０２５２　

The jack is behind a cover in theright fender. Remove the cover byturning the handle counterclock-wise, then pulling on the cover.

Turn the jack’s end bracketcounterclockwise to loosen it, thenremove the jack.

Loosen each wheel nut 1/2 turnwith the wheel nut wrench.

6. 7. 8.

Changing a Flat Tire

250

JACK

WHEEL NUT

WHEEL NUT WRENCH

０４／０８／０５　１１：１７：２８　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０２５３　

CONTINUED

Place the jack under the jackingpoint nearest the tire you need tochange. Turn the end bracketclockwise until the top of the jackcontacts the jacking point. Makesure the jacking point tab isresting in the jack notch.

Remove the wheel nuts, thenremove the flat tire. Handle thewheel nuts carefully; they may behot from driving. Place the flat tireon the ground with the outsidesurface facing up.

Do not attempt to forcibly pry thewheel cover off with a screwdriver orother tool. The wheel cover cannotbe removed without first removingthe wheel nuts.

Use the extension and the wheelnut wrench as shown to raise thevehicle until the flat tire is off theground.

9. 10.

11.

On LX and LX-V6 models


Care

ofthe

Unexpected

251

JACKING POINT

WHEEL COVER

WHEEL NUTSWHEEL NUT WRENCH EXTENSION

０４／０８／０５　１１：１７：３７　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０２５４　

Lower the vehicle to the groundand remove the jack.

Before mounting the spare tire,wipe any dirt off the mountingsurface of the wheel and hub witha clean cloth. Wipe the hubcarefully; it may be hot fromdriving.

Put on the spare tire. Put thewheel nuts back on finger-tight,then tighten them in a crisscrosspattern with the wheel nut wrenchuntil the wheel is firmly againstthe hub. Do not try to tightenthem fully.

13. 14.12.

Changing a Flat Tire

252

BRAKE HUB

０４／０８／０５　１１：１７：４６　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０２５５　

CONTINUED

Remove the center cap beforestoring the flat tire in the trunkwell.

Place the flat tire face down in thespare tire well.

Remove the spacer cone from thewing bolt, turn it over, and put itback on the bolt.

Secure the flat tire by screwingthe wing bolt back into its hole.

Tighten the wheel nuts securely inthe same crisscross pattern. Havethe wheel nut torque checked atthe nearest automotive servicefacility.

Tighten the wheel nuts to:

15. 16. 17.

18.

19.

EX and EX-V6 models


Care

ofthe

Unexpected

253

WING BOLT

SPACER CONE

Forsparetire

Fornormaltire

80 lbf·ft (108 N·m , 11 kgf·m)

０４／０８／０５　１１：１７：５７　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０２５６　

Store the jack in its holder. Turnthe jack’s end bracket to lock it inplace. Replace the cover. Store thetools.

Store the wheel cover or centercap in the trunk. Make sure it doesnot get scratched or damaged.

Lower the trunk floor, then closethe trunk lid.

Diagnosing why the engine won’tstart falls into two areas, dependingon what you hear when you turn thekey to START (III):

You hear nothing, or almostnothing. The engine’s startermotor does not operate at all, oroperates very slowly.

You can hear the starter motoroperating normally, or the startermotor sounds like it is spinningfaster than normal, but the enginedoes not start up and run.

When you turn the ignition switch toSTART (III), you do not hear thenormal noise of the engine trying tostart. You may hear a clicking soundor series of clicks, or nothing at all.Check these things:

Check the transmission interlock.If you have a manual transmission,the clutch pedal must be pushedall the way to the floor or thestarter will not operate. With anautomatic transmission, it must bein Park or Neutral.

Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).Turn on the headlights, and checktheir brightness. If the headlightsare very dim or do not come on atall, the battery is discharged. See

on page .

Turn the ignition switch to START(III). If the headlights do not dim,check the condition of the fuses. Ifthe fuses are OK, there isprobably something wrong withthe electrical circuit for theignition switch or starter motor.You will need a qualifiedtechnician to determine theproblem (seeon page ).

20.

21.

22.

256

269

If the Engine Won’t Start

Nothing Happens or the StarterMotor Operates Very Slowly

Jump Starting

Emergency Towing

Changing a Flat Tire, If the Engine Won’t Start

254

Loose items can fly around theinterior in a crash and couldseriously injure the occupants.

Store the wheel, jack, and toolssecurely before driving.

０４／０８／０５　１１：１８：１０　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０２５７　

If the headlights dim noticeably orgo out when you try to start theengine, either the battery isdischarged or the connections arecorroded. Check the condition of thebattery and terminal connections(see page ). You can then tryjump starting the vehicle from abooster battery (see page ).

If you find nothing wrong, you willneed a qualified technician to findthe problem. See

on page .

There may be an electricalproblem, such as no power to thefuel pump. Check all the fuses(see page ).

Do you have fuel? Check the fuelgauge; the low fuel indicator maynot be working.

Are you using a properly codedkey? An improperly coded key willcause the immobilizer systemindicator in the instrument panelto blink rapidly (see page ).

In this case, the starter motor’sspeed sounds normal, or even fasterthan normal, when you turn theignition switch to START (III), butthe engine does not run.

Are you using the proper startingprocedure? Refer to

on page .

244

256175

269

264

59

If the Engine Won’t Start

EmergencyTowing

The Starter Operates Normally

Starting theEngine

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

255

０４／０８／０５　１１：１８：２０　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０２５８　

Although this seems like a simpleprocedure, you should take severalprecautions.

You cannot start your vehicle with anautomatic transmission by pushingor pulling it.

Open the hood, and check thephysical condition of the battery.In very cold weather, check thecondition of the electrolyte. If itseems slushy or frozen, do not tryjump starting until it thaws.

To jump start your vehicle:

Turn off all the electrical acces-sories: heater, A/C, climatecontrol, stereo system, lights, etc.

The numbers in the illustrationsshow you the order to connect thejumper cables.

Put the transmission in Neutral(M/T) or Park (A/T), and set theparking brake.

1.

2.

Jump Starting

256

4-cylinder models

BOOSTERBATTERY

A battery can explode if you donot follow the correct procedure,seriously injuring anyonenearby.

Keep all sparks, open flames,and smoking materials awayfrom the battery.

If a battery sits in extreme cold, theelectrolyte inside can f reeze.Attempting to jump start with a f rozenbattery can cause it to rupture.

０４／０８／０５　１１：１８：３１　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０２５９　

－＋

＋

Start the vehicle. If the startermotor still operates slowly, checkthat the jumper cables have goodmetal-to-metal contact.

If the booster battery is in anothervehicle, have an assistant startthat vehicle and run it at a fast idle.

Connect the second jumper cableto the negative ( ) terminal onthe booster battery. Connect theother end to the grounding strapas shown. Do not connect thisjumper cable to any other part ofthe engine.

Connect one jumper cable to thepositive ( ) terminal on yourbattery. Connect the other end tothe positive ( ) terminal on thebooster battery.

6.

5.

4.3.

CONTINUED

Jump StartingTaking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

257

6-cylinder models4-cylinder models6-cylinder models

BOOSTERBATTERY

０４／０８／０５　１１：１８：４１　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０２６０　

Once your vehicle is running,disconnect the negative cable fromyour vehicle, then from thebooster battery. Disconnect thepositive cable from your vehicle,then from the booster battery.

Keep the ends of the jumpercables away from each other andany metal on the vehicle untileverything is disconnected.Otherwise, you may cause anelectrical short.

If your vehicle overheats, you shouldtake immediate action. The onlyindication may be the temperaturegauge climbing to or above the redmark. Or you may see steam orspray coming from under the hood.

The pointer of the vehicle’stemperature gauge should stay inthe midrange. If it climbs to the redmark, you should determine thereason (hot day, driving up a steephill, etc.).

Safely pull to the side of the road.Put the transmission in Neutral(M/T) or Park (A/T), and set theparking brake. Turn off allaccessories, and turn on thehazard warning indicators.

If you see steam and/or spraycoming from under the hood, turnoff the engine. Wait until you seeno more signs of steam or spray,then open the hood.

2.

1.

7.

Jump Starting, If the Engine Overheats

If the Engine Overheats

258

Steam and spray from anoverheated engine canseriously scald you.

Do not open the hood if steamis coming out.

Driving with the temperature gaugepointer at the red mark can causeserious damage to your engine.

０４／０８／０５　１１：１８：５１　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０２６１　

Start the engine, and set thetemperature control dial tomaximum heat (climate control toAUTO at ‘‘ ’’). Add coolantto the radiator up to the base ofthe filler neck. If you do not havethe proper coolant mixtureavailable, you can add plain water.Remember to have the coolingsystem drained and refilled withthe proper mixture as soon as youcan.

Put the radiator cap back ontightly. Run the engine, and watchthe temperature gauge. If it goesback to the red mark, the engineneeds repair (see

on page ).

If the temperature stays normal,check the coolant level in theradiator reserve tank. If it hasgone down, add coolant to theMAX mark. Put the cap back ontightly.

Using gloves or a large heavycloth, turn the radiator capcounterclockwise, without pushingdown, to the first stop. After thepressure releases, push down onthe cap, and turn it until it comesoff.

If there was no coolant in thereserve tank, you may need to addcoolant to the radiator. Let theengine cool down until the pointerreaches the middle of thetemperature gauge or lowerbefore checking the radiator.

If you don’t find an obvious leak,check the coolant level in theradiator reserve tank (see page

).

If you do not see steam or spray,leave the engine running, andwatch the temperature gauge. Ifthe high heat is due to overloading,the engine should start to cooldown almost immediately. If itdoes, wait until the temperaturegauge comes down to the midpoint,then continue driving.

If the temperature gauge stays atthe red mark, turn off the engine.

Look for any obvious coolant leaks,such as a split radiator hose.Everything is still extremely hot,so use caution. If you find a leak, itmust be repaired before youcontinue driving (see

on page ).

6.

7.

8.

9.

10.

11.

3.

4.

5.

269

165

269

If the Engine Overheats

EmergencyTowingEmergency

Towing

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

259

Removing the radiator capwhile the engine is hot cancause the coolant to spray out,seriously scalding you.

Always let the engine andradiator cool down beforeremoving the radiator cap.

０４／０８／０５　１１：１９：０３　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０２６２　

This indicator should never come onwhen the engine is running. If itstarts flashing or stays on, the oilpressure has dropped very low orlost pressure. Serious enginedamage is possible and you shouldtake immediate action.

Safely pull off the road, and shutoff the engine. Turn on the hazardwarning indicators.

Let the vehicle sit for a minute.Open the hood, and check the oillevel (see page ). An enginevery low on oil can lose pressureduring cornering and other drivingmaneuvers.

If necessary, add oil to bring thelevel back to the full mark on thedipstick (see page ).

Start the engine, and watch the oilpressure indicator. If it does not goout within 10 seconds, turn off theengine. There is a mechanicalproblem that needs to be repairedbefore you can continue driving(see on page

).

If the charging system indicatorcomes on brightly when the engineis running, the battery is not beingcharged.

Immediately turn off all electricalaccessories. Try not to use otherelectrically operated controls such asthe power windows. Keep the enginerunning; starting the engine willdischarge the battery rapidly.

Go to a service station or garagewhere you can get technicalassistance.

1.

2.

3.

4.

213

164

269

Low Oil PressureIndicator

Emergency Towing

Charging SystemIndicator

Low Oil Pressure Indicator, Charging System Indicator

260

Running the engine with low oilpressure can cause serious mechanicaldamage almost immediately. Turn of fthe engine as soon as you can saf ely getthe vehicle stopped.

０４／０８／０５　１１：１９：１４　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０２６３　

This indicator may also come onalong with the ‘‘D’’ indicator.

Your vehicle has certain ‘‘readinesscodes’’ that are part of the on-boarddiagnostics for the emissionssystems. In some states, part of theemissions testing is to make surethese codes are set. If they are notset, the test cannot be completed.

If your vehicle battery has beendisconnected or gone dead, thesecodes are erased. It takes at leastthree days of driving under variousconditions to set the codes again.

If the indicator comes onwhile driving, it means one

of the engine’s emissions controlsystems may have a problem. Eventhough you may feel no difference inyour vehicle’s performance, it canreduce your fuel economy and causeincreased emissions. Continuedoperation may cause serious damage.

If you have recently refueled yourvehicle, the indicator coming oncould be due to a loose or missingfuel fill cap. Tighten the cap until itclicks at least three times.Tightening the cap will not turn theindicator off immediately; it takes atleast three days of normal driving.

If the indicator comes on repeatedly,even though it may turn off as youcontinue driving, have the vehiclechecked by the dealer as soon aspossible.

To check if they are set, turn theignition switch to ON (II), withoutstarting the engine. The malfunctionindicator lamp will come on for 20seconds. If it then goes off, thereadiness codes are set. If it blinks 5times, the readiness codes are notset. If possible, do not take yourvehicle for a state emissions testuntil the readiness codes are set.Refer tofor more information (see page ).284

Malfunction Indicator Lamp

Readiness Codes

State Emissions Testing

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

261

If you keep driving with themalf unction indicator lamp on, you candamage your vehicle’s emissionscontrols and the engine. Those repairsmay not be covered by your vehicle’swarranties.

０４／０８／０５　１１：１９：２４　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０２６４　

If you must drive the vehicle a shortdistance in this condition, driveslowly and carefully.

If the ABS indicator comes on withthe brake system indicator, haveyour vehicle inspected by yourdealer immediately.

The brake system indicator normallycomes on when you turn the ignitionswitch to ON (II), and as a reminderto check the parking brake. It willstay on if you do not fully release theparking brake.

If the brake system indicator comeson while driving, the brake fluid levelis probably low. Press lightly on thebrake pedal to see if it feels normal.If it does, check the brake fluid levelthe next time you stop at a servicestation (see page ).

If the fluid level is low, take yourvehicle to a dealer, and have thebrake system inspected for leaks orworn brake pads.

However, if the brake pedal does notfeel normal, you should takeimmediate action. A problem in onepart of the system’s dual circuitdesign will still give you braking attwo wheels. You will feel the brakepedal go down much farther beforethe vehicle begins to slow down, andyou will have to press harder on thepedal.

Slow down by shifting to a lowergear, and pull to the side of the roadwhen it is safe. Because of the longdistance needed to stop, it ishazardous to drive the vehicle. Youshould have it towed and repaired assoon as possible (see

on page ).269

226

Brake System Indicator

EmergencyTowing

262

U.S. Canada

０４／０８／０５　１１：１９：３４　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０２６５　

If the electric motor will not closethe moonroof, do the following:

Check the fuse for the moonroofmotor (see page ). If the fuseis blown, replace it with one of thesame or lower rating.

Try closing the moonroof. If thenew fuse blows immediately or themoonroof motor still does notoperate, you can close themoonroof manually.

Get the moonroof wrench out ofthe tool kit in the trunk.

Remove the wrench. Reinstall theround plug.

If you need to close the moonroofmanually, it means the moonroofopening/closing function isdeveloping a problem. Have yourvehicle checked by your dealer.

To remove the round plug in thecenter of the headliner, turn theplug by using a screwdriver orcoin, then pry it out. Make sure toalign the tabs on the round plug tothe notches on the ceilling asshown in the illustration.

Insert the moonroof wrenchsecurely into the socket behindthis plug. Hold the longer handleas shown and turn the wrenchslowly until the moonroof is fullyclosed.4.

3.

1.

2.

5. 6.

268

If equipped

Closing the MoonroofTaking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

263

SOCKET

ROUND PLUG

TAB

NOTCH

MOONROOF WRENCH

０４／０８／０５　１１：１９：４７　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０２６６　

The under-hood fuse box is on thedriver’s side. To open it, push thetabs as shown.

If something electrical in yourvehicle stops working, the first thingyou should check for is a blown fuse.Determine from the chart on pages

and , or the diagram on thefuse box lid, which fuse or fusescontrol that device. Check thosefuses first, but check all the fusesbefore deciding that a blown fuse isthe cause. Replace any blown fuses,and check if the device works.

Turn the ignition switch to LOCK(0). Make sure the headlights andall other accessories are off.

Remove the cover from the fusebox.

The interior fuse box is on thedriver’s lower left side. To removethe fuse box lid, put your finger inthe notch on the lid, and pull itupward slightly, then pull it towardyou and take it out of its hinges.

The vehicle’s fuses are contained intwo fuse boxes.

1.

2.

268267

Checking and Replacing Fuses

Fuses

264

INTERIOR UNDER-HOOD

TAB

NOTCH

０４／０８／０５　１１：１９：５９　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０２６７　

Check the smaller fuses in theunder-hood fuse box and all thefuses in the interior fuse box bypulling out each one with the fusepuller provided in the under-hoodfuse box.

Check each of the large fuses inthe under-hood fuse box bylooking through the side windowat the wire inside. Removing thesefuses requires a Phillips-headscrewdriver.

3. 4.

CONTINUED

FusesTaking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

265

BLOWN BLOWN FUSE PULLERFUSE

０４／０８／０５　１１：２０：０９　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０２６８　

If you cannot drive the vehiclewithout fixing the problem, and youdo not have a spare fuse, take a fuseof the same rating or a lower ratingfrom one of the other circuits withthe fuse puller provided in the under-hood fuse box. Make sure you cando without that circuit temporarily(such as the accessory power socketor radio).

If you replace the blown fuse with aspare fuse that has a lower rating, itmight blow out again. This does notindicate anything wrong. Replace thefuse with one of the correct rating assoon as you can.

If the replacement fuse of thesame rating blows in a short time,there is probably a seriouselectrical problem with yourvehicle. Leave the blown fuse inthat circuit, and have your vehiclechecked by a qualified mechanic.

If the radio fuse is removed, theaudio system will disable itself.The next time you turn on theradio you will see ‘‘CODE/COdE’’in the frequency display. Use thepreset bars to enter the code (seepage ).

Look for a blown wire inside thefuse. If it is blown, replace it withone of the spare fuses of the samerating or lower.

5.

6.

149

Fuses

266

BLOWNFUSE

Replacing a f use with one that has ahigher rating greatly increases thechances of damaging the electricalsystem. If you do not have areplacement f use with the proper ratingf or the circuit, install one with a lowerrating.

０４／０８／０５　１１：２０：１７　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０２６９　

－

－

＊

＊

＊

＋

＊

No. Amps. Circuits Protected No. Amps. Circuits Protected

No. Amps. Circuits Protected

CONTINUED

: 6-cylinder models

12345

10 A(30A)10 A15 A10 A

Left Headlight Low Beam(Rear Defroster Coil)Left Headlight High BeamSmall LightRight Headlight High Beam

6789

10

10 A7.5 A15 A20 A

Right Headlight Low BeamBack UpFI ECUCondenser fanNot Used

111112131415161717181819202122

23

20 A30 A7.5 A20 A40 A40 A15 A30 A30 A20 A40 A40 A

(40 A)40 A

100 A

50 A50 A

Cooling FanCooling FanMG. ClutchHorn, StopRear DefrosterBack Up, ACCHazardABS MotorTCS MotorABS F/STCSOptionOptionHeater MotorBatteryNot Used

B IG1 MainPower Window Main

Fuse LocationsTaking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

267

UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX

０４／０８／０５　１１：２０：２７　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０２７０　

＊

－

－

－

－

－

－

－－

＊

No. Amps. Circuits Protected Amps. Circuits ProtectedNo.

No. Amps. Circuits Protected

: On Canadian models

1234567

(15 A)15 A

(10 A)15 A10 A7.5 A10 A

DBWIgnition CoilDaytime Running LightLaf HeaterRadioInterior LightBack-Up Lights

20 A15 A7.5 A

30 A

Door LockFront Accessory SocketsIG OPDS (OccupantPosition Detection System)IG WiperNot UsedNot Used

89

10

111213

141516

1718192021222324252627282930313233

(20 A)(20 A)(20 A)

15 A15 A7.5 A7.5 A10 A7.5 A

20 A20 A

(20 A)

7.5 A

7.5 A

Driver’s Power Seat SlidingHeated SeatsDriver’s Power SeatRecliningNot UsedIG ACGIG Fuel PumpIG WasherIG MeterIG SRSIGP (PGM-FI ECU)Not UsedNot UsedPassenger’s Power WindowDriver’s Power WindowMoonroofNot UsedIG HACNot UsedACCNot Used

Fuse Locations

268

INTERIOR FUSE BOX

０４／０８／０５　１１：２０：３６　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０２７１　

－

－

If your vehicle needs to be towed,call a professional towing service ororganization. Never tow your vehiclewith just a rope or chain. It is verydangerous.

If, due to damage, your vehicle mustbe towed with the front wheels onthe ground, do the following:

Release the parking brake.Shift the transmission to Neutral.

With the front wheels on the ground,it is best to tow the vehicle no fartherthan 50 miles (80 km), and keep thespeed below 35 mph (55 km/h).

If your vehicle is equipped with afront spoiler, remove it beforetowing so it is not damaged.

Turn off the engine.Shift to D, then to N.Start the engine.Release the parking brake.

The towtruck uses two pivoting arms that gounder the tires (front or rear) and liftthem off the ground. The other twotires remain on the ground.

The operatorloads your vehicle on the back of atruck.

There are two ways to tow yourvehicle.

CONTINUED

Manual Transmission:

Automatic Transmission:

Emergency Towing

Wheel-lif t Equipment

Flat-bed Equipment

This isan acceptable way to tow yourvehicle.

This is the best way to trans-port your vehicle.

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

269

Improper towing preparation willdamage the transmission. Follow theabove procedure exactly. If you cannotshif t the transmission or start theengine (automatic transmission), yourvehicle must be transported with thef ront wheels of f the ground.

Trying to lif t or tow your vehicle by thebumpers will cause serious damage.The bumpers are not designed tosupport the vehicle’s weight.

０４／０８／０５　１１：２０：５３　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０２７２　

If you decide to tow your vehiclewith all four wheels on the ground,make sure you use a properly-designed and attached tow bar.Prepare the vehicle for towing asdescribed previously, and leave theignition switch in the ACCESSORY(I) position so the steering wheeldoes not lock. Make sure the radioand any items plugged into theaccessory power socket are turnedoff so they do not run down thebattery.

Emergency Towing

270

The steering system can be damaged ifthe steering wheel is locked. Leave theignition switch in the ACCESSORY (I)position, and make sure the steeringwheel turns f reely bef ore you begintowing.

０４／０８／０５　１１：２０：５７　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０２７３　

The diagrams in this section giveyou the dimensions and capacities ofyour vehicle, and the locations of theidentification numbers. It alsoincludes information you shouldknow about your vehicle’s tires andemissions control systems.

................Identification Numbers . 272Specifications

..................(4-cylinder Models) . 274Specifications

..................(6-cylinder Models) . 276DOT Tire Quality Grading

.....................(U. S. Vehicles) . 278Uniform Tire Quality

..................................Grading . 278.................................Treadwear . 278

......................................Traction . 278.............................Temperature . 279

.................................Tire Labeling . 280

.......................Emissions Controls . 281.....................The Clean Air Act . 281

Crankcase Emissions Control....................................System . 281

Evaporative Emissions Control....................................System . 281

Onboard Refueling Vapor................................Recovery . 281

...Exhaust Emissions Controls . 282....................PGM-FI System . 282

Ignition Timing Control................................System . 282

Exhaust Gas Recirculation...................(EGR) System . 282

Three Way Catalytic...........................Converter . 282

....................Replacement Parts . 282..Three Way Catalytic Converter . 283

..............State Emissions Testing . 284

Technical InformationTechnicalInform

ation

271

０４／０８／０５　１１：２１：０１　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０２７４　

Your vehicle has several identifyingnumbers in various places.

The vehicle identification number(VIN) is the 17-digit number yourdealer uses to register your vehiclefor warranty purposes. It is alsonecessary for licensing and insuringyour vehicle. The easiest place tofind the VIN is on a plate fastened tothe top of the dashboard. You cansee it by looking through thewindshield on the driver’s side. It isalso on the certification labelattached to the driver’s doorjamb,and is stamped on the enginecompartment bulkhead. The VIN isalso provided in bar code on thecertification label.

Identif ication Numbers

272

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER

CERTIFICATION LABEL

０４／０８／０５　１１：２１：０６　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０２７５　

The transmission number is on alabel on top of the transmission.

The engine number is stamped intothe engine block. It is on the front.

Identif ication NumbersTechnicalInform

ation

273

AUTOMATIC/MANUAL TRANSMISSION NUMBER

ENGINE NUMBER6-cylinder Models

MANUALTRANSMISSIONNUMBER

ENGINE NUMBER

4-cylinder ModelsAUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION NUMBER

０４／０８／０５　１１：２１：１２　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０２７６　

－－

＊

＊

＊

＊

Specifications (4-cylinder Models)

274

Dimensions

Weights

Air Conditioning

Capacities

187.6 in (4,766 mm)71.3 in (1,810 mm)55.7 in (1,415 mm)105.1 in (2,670 mm)61.1 in (1,553 mm)61.2 in (1,554 mm)

1.88 US gal (7.1 )1.90 US gal (7.2 )

1.37 US gal (5.2 )1.40 US gal (5.3 )

5.6 US qt (5.3 )HFC-134a (R-134a)

17.6 19.4 oz (500 550 g)

4.4 US qt (4.2 )

4.2 US qt (4.0 )

ND-OIL8 2.0 US qt (1.9 )2.2 US qt (2.1 )3.0 US qt (2.8 )6.9 US qt (6.5 )

2.6 US qt (2.5 )

0.16 US gal (0.6 )

4.8 US qt (4.5 )

17.09 US gal (64.7 )

Including the coolant in the reserve tank and that remaining in theengine.Reserve tank capacity:

Excluding the oil remaining in the engine.

LengthWidthHeightWheelbaseTrack

Gross vehicle weight rating See the certification label attachedto the driver’s doorjamb.

Refrigerant typeCharge quantityLubricant type

Fuel tank

Enginecoolant

Engine oil

Manual trans-mission fluidAutomatictransmissionfluidWindshieldwasherreservoir

FrontRear

Approx.

1 :

2 :

ChangeManualAutomatic

TotalManualAutomatic

ChangeIncludingfilterWithoutfilter

TotalChangeTotalChangeTotal

U.S. VehiclesCanada Vehicles

1

2

０４／０８／０５　１１：２１：３１　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０２７７　

－

－－－

－－－－－－－－－－

－－

＊＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

Specifications (4-cylinder Models)TechnicalInform

ation

275

Tires

Lights

Battery

Fuses

Engine

Alignment

12 V

12 V

24/2.2 CP

12 V12 V

60 W (HB3)51 W (HB4)

12 V

12 V12 V12 V12 V12 V

12 V12 V

12 V

21 W21/5 W18 W3 CP8 W21 W5 W2 CP1.1 W8 W

12 V12 V

38 AH/5 HR47 AH/20 HR

3.43 x 3.90 in (87.0 x 99.0 mm)144 cu-in (2,354 cm )

9.7 : 1

0.00 in (0.0 mm)0.08 in (2.0 mm)

0°1°

3°15’

P205/65R15 92HP205/60R16 91V

T135/90D15 100M30 psi (210 kPa , 2.1 kgf/cm )32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm )29 psi (200 kPa , 2.0 kgf/cm )30 psi (210 kPa , 2.1 kgf/cm )60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )

Size

Pressure

Water cooled 4-stroke i-VTEC4-cylinder gasoline engine

Headlights

Front turn signal/parking/sidemarker lightsRear turn signal lights

Back-up lightsLicense plate lightsCeiling lightHigh-mount brake lightTrunk lightDoor courtesy lightsVanity mirror lightsSpotlights

Capacity

Interior

Under-hood

Type

Bore x StrokeDisplacementCompression ratioSpark plugs

Toe-in

Camber

Caster

NGK:DENSO:

IZFR6K-11SKJ20DR-M11

See page 268 or the fuse labelattached to the inside of the fusebox lid.See page 267 or the fuse boxcover.

FrontRearFrontRearFront

HighLow

1 : LX2 : EX

Front/Rear

SpareFront

Rear

Spare

Stop/taillight/side marker lights

1

2

1

2

1

2

０４／０８／０５　１１：２１：５８　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０２７８　

－－

＊

＊

＊

＊

Specifications (6-cylinder Models)

276

Dimensions

Weights

Air Conditioning

Capacities

61.1 in (1,553 mm)61.2 in (1,554 mm)

17.6 19.4 oz (500 550 g)HFC-134a (R-134a)

ND-OIL8

2.6 US qt (2.5 )4.8 US qt (4.5 )

7.6 US qt (7.2 )3.1 US qt (2.9 )

5.3 US qt (5.0 )

4.2 US qt (4.0 )

4.5 US qt (4.3 )

0.16 US gal (0.6 )

1.77 US gal (6.7 )

2.22 US gal (8.4 )

105.1 in (2,670 mm) 1.74 US gal (6.6 )

187.6 in (4,766 mm)71.3 in (1,810 mm)55.7 in (1,415 mm)

2.17 US gal (8.2 )

2.3 US qt (2.2 )2.6 US qt (2.5 )

17.09 US gal (64.7 )

Including the coolant in the reserve tank and that remaining in theengine.Reserve tank capacity:

Excluding the oil remaining in the engine.

LengthWidthHeightWheelbaseTrack

Gross vehicle weight rating

Refrigerant typeCharge quantityLubricant type

See the certification label attachedto the driver’s doorjamb.

Fuel tank

Enginecoolant

Engine oil

ManualtransmissionfluidAutomatictransmissionfluidWindshieldwasherreservoir

FrontRear

Approx.

1 :

2 :

ChangeManualAutomatic

TotalManualAutomatic

ChangeIncludingfilterWithoutfilter

TotalChangeTotal

ChangeTotal

U.S. VehiclesCanada Vehicles

1

2

０４／０８／０５　１１：２２：１５　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０２７９　

－

＊＊

－－－

－－－－－－－－－－

－－＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

Specifications (6-cylinder Models)TechnicalInform

ation

277

Lights

Battery

Fuses

Engine

Alignment

Tires

12 V12 V12 V

12 V12 V12 V12 V12 V12 V12 V12 V12 V12 V

12 V12 V

63 W (HB3)51 W (HB4)24/2.2 CP

21 W21/5 W18 W3 CP8 W21 W5 W2 CP1.1 W8 W

52 AH/5 HR65 AH/20 HR

3.39 x 3.39 in (86.0 x 86.0 mm)183 cu-in (2,997 cm )

10.0 : 1

0.00 in (0.0 mm)0.08 in (2.0 mm)

0°1°

3°15’

P215/50R17 93VP205/60R16 91V

T135/90D15 100M

32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm )T135/80R16 101M

60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )29 psi (200 kPa , 2.0 kgf/cm )30 psi (210 kPa , 2.1 kgf/cm )

Headlights

Front turn signal/parking/sidemarker lightsRear turn signal lights

Back-up lightsLicense plate lightsCeiling lightHigh-mount brake lightTrunk lightDoor courtesy lightsVanity mirror lightsSpotlights

Capacity

Interior

Under-hood

Type

Bore x StrokeDisplacementCompression ratioSpark plugs

Water cooled 4-strokeSOHC VTEC

6-cylinder gasoline engine

Toe-in

Camber

Caster

Size

Pressure

NGK:DENSO:

IZFR6K-11SKJ20DR-M11

See page 268 or the fuse labelattached to the inside of the fusebox lid.See page 267 or the fuse boxcover.

FrontRearFrontRearFront

HighLow

1 :2 :

LX-V6, EX-V6 with automatic transmissionEX-V6 with manual transmission

Front/Rear

Spare

FrontRear

Spare

Stop/taillight/side marker lights

1

2

1

2

1

2

０４／０８／０５　１１：２２：４２　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０２８０　

－

Quality grades can be found whereapplicable on the tire sidewallbetween the tread shoulder and themaximum section width. Forexample:

All passenger car tires must conformto Federal Safety Requirements inaddition to these grades.

The treadwear grade is a compara-tive rating based on the wear rate ofthe tire when tested under controlledconditions on a specified governmenttest course. For example, a tiregraded 150 would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on thegovernment course as a tire graded100. The relative performance oftires depends upon the actual condi-tions of their use, however, and maydepart significantly from the normdue to variations in driving habits,service practices, and differences inroad characteristics and climate.

The traction grades, from highest tolowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Thosegrades represent the tire’s ability tostop on wet pavement as measuredunder controlled conditions onspecified government test surfacesof asphalt and concrete. A tiremarked C may have poor tractionperformance.

Warning: The traction gradeassigned to this tire is based onstraight-ahead braking traction tests,and does not include acceleration,cornering, hydroplaning, or peaktraction characteristics.

The tires on your vehicle meet allU.S. Federal Safety Requirements.All tires are also graded fortreadwear, traction, and temperatureperformance according toDepartment of Transportation(DOT) standards. The followingexplains these gradings.

DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)

Uniform Tire Quality Grading

Treadwear 200Traction AATemperature A

Treadwear Traction AA, A, B, C

278

０４／０８／０５　１１：２２：５２　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０２８１　

－The temperature grades are A (thehighest), B, and C, representing thetire’s resistance to the generation ofheat and its ability to dissipate heatwhen tested under controlledconditions on a specified indoorlaboratory test wheel. Sustained hightemperature can cause the materialof the tire to degenerate and reducetire life, and excessive temperaturecan lead to sudden tire failure. Thegrade C corresponds to a level ofperformance which all passenger cartires must meet under the FederalMotor Vehicle Safety Standard No.109. Grades B and A representhigher levels of performance on thelaboratory test wheel than theminimum required by law.

Warning: The temperature grade forthis tire is established for a tire thatis properly inflated and not over-loaded. Excessive speed, underinfla-tion, or excessive loading, eitherseparately or in combination, cancause heat buildup and possible tirefailure.

DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)

Temperature A, B, C

TechnicalInform

ation

279

０４／０８／０５　１１：２２：５７　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０２８２　

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

The tires that came on your vehiclehave a number of markings. Thoseyou should be aware of are describedbelow.

Whenever tires are replaced, theyshould be replaced with tires of thesame size. Following is an exampleof tire size with an explanation ofwhat each component means.

Vehicle type (P indicatespassenger vehicle).

Tire width in millimeters.

Aspect ratio (the tire’s sectionheight as a percentage of itswidth).

Tire construction code (Rindicates radial).

Rim diameter in inches.

Load index (a numerical codeassociated with the maximumload the tire can carry).

Speed symbol (analphabetical code indicatingthe maximum speed rating).

Tire Identification Number (TIN) isa group of numbers and letters thatlook like the following example TIN.

Date of manufacture.

The maximum airpressure the tire canhold.

The maximum loadthe tire can carry atmaximum airpressure.

Tire type code.

Manufacturer’sidentification mark.

This indicates that the tiremeets all requirements ofthe U.S. Department ofTransportation.

P

R

V

16

DOT

B97R

FW6X

2202

205

60

91Max Press

Max Load

Tire Labeling

Tire Size

Tire Identif ication Number

Maximum Tire Pressure

Maximum Tire Load

280

P205/60R16 91V

DOT B97R FW6X 2202

０４／０８／０５　１１：２３：１５　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０２８３　

＊

＊

The United States Clean Air Actsets standards for automobileemissions. It also requires thatautomobile manufacturers explain toowners how their emissions controlswork and what to do to maintainthem. This section summarizes howthe emissions controls work.Scheduled maintenance is on pages

and .

In Canada, Honda vehicles complywith the Canadian emissionrequirements, as specified in anagreement with EnvironmentCanada, at the time they aremanufactured.

Your vehicle has a positivecrankcase ventilation system. Thiskeeps gasses that build up in theengine’s crankcase from going intothe atmosphere. The positive

crankcase ventilation valve routesthem from the crankcase back to theintake manifold. They are thendrawn into the engine and burned.

As gasoline evaporates in the fueltank, an evaporative emissionscontrol canister filled with charcoaladsorbs the vapor. It is stored in thiscanister while the engine is off. Afterthe engine is started and warmed up,the vapor is drawn into the engineand burned during driving.

The onboard refueling vaporrecovery (ORVR) system capturesthe fuel vapors during refueling. Thevapors are adsorbed in a canisterfilled with activated carbon. Whiledriving, the fuel vapors are drawninto the engine and burned off.

The burning of gasoline in yourvehicle’s engine produces several by-products. Some of these are carbonmonoxide (CO), oxides of nitrogen(NOx), and hydrocarbons (HC).Gasoline evaporating from the tankalso produces hydrocarbons.Controlling the production of NOx,CO, and HC is important to theenvironment. Under certainconditions of sunlight and climate,NOx and HC react to formphotochemical ‘‘smog.’’ Carbonmonoxide does not contribute tosmog creation, but it is a poisonousgas.

201 206

Emissions Controls

The Clean Air Act

Crankcase Emissions ControlSystem

Evaporative Emissions ControlSystem

Onboard Refueling VaporRecovery T

echnicalInformation

281

０４／０８／０５　１１：２３：２５　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０２８４　

The exhaust emissions controlsinclude four systems: PGM-FI,ignition timing control, exhaust gasrecirculation and three way catalyticconverter. These four systems worktogether to control the engine’scombustion and minimize theamount of HC, CO, and NOx thatcomes out the tailpipe. The exhaustemissions control systems areseparate from the crankcase andevaporative emissions controlsystems.

The PGM-FI system uses sequentialmultiport fuel injection. It has threesubsystems: air intake, enginecontrol, and fuel control. Thepowertrain control module (PCM) inautomatic transmission vehicles orthe engine control module (ECM) inmanual transmission vehicles usesvarious sensors to determine howmuch air is going into the engine. It

then controls how much fuel to injectunder all operating conditions. The emissions control systems are

designed and certified to work to-gether in reducing emissions tolevels that comply with the Clean AirAct. To make sure the emissionsremain low, you should use only newHonda replacement parts or theirequivalent for repairs. Using lowerquality parts may increase theemissions from your vehicle.

The emissions control systems arecovered by warranties separate fromthe rest of your vehicle. Read yourwarranty manual for more informa-tion.

The three way catalytic converter isin the exhaust system. Throughchemical reactions, it converts HC,CO, and NOx in the engine’s exhaustto carbon dioxide (CO ), nitrogen(N ), and water vapor.

The exhaust gas recirculation (EGR)system takes some of the exhaustgas and routes it back into the intakemanifold. Adding exhaust gas to theair/fuel mixture reduces the amountof NOx produced when the fuel isburned.

This system constantly adjusts theignition timing, reducing the amountof HC, CO, and NOx produced.

2

2

Emissions Controls

Exhaust Emissions Controls Replacement Parts

PGM-FI System

Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR)System

Ignition Timing Control System

Three Way Catalytic Converter

282

０４／０８／０５　１１：２３：３６　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０２８５　

The three way catalytic convertercontains precious metals that serveas catalysts, promoting chemicalreactions to convert the exhaustgasses without affecting the metals.The catalytic converter is referred toas a three-way catalyst, since it actson HC, CO, and NOx. A replacementunit must be an original Honda partor its equivalent.

The three way catalytic convertermust operate at a high temperaturefor the chemical reactions to takeplace. It can set on fire any com-bustible materials that come near it.Park your vehicle away from highgrass, dry leaves, or other flamma-bles.

A defective three way catalyticconverter contributes to air pollution,and can impair your engine’s per-formance. Follow these guidelines toprotect your vehicle’s three waycatalytic converter.

Always use unleaded gasoline.Even a small amount of leadedgasoline can contaminate thecatalyst metals, making the threeway catalytic converter ineffective.

Keep the engine tuned-up.

Have your vehicle diagnosed andrepaired if it is misfiring, back-firing, stalling, or otherwise notrunning properly.

Three Way Catalytic ConverterTechnicalInform

ation

283


THREE WAY CATALYTIC CONVERTER THREE WAY CATALYTIC CONVERTERS

０４／０８／０５　１１：２３：４５　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０２８６　

If the testing facility determines thatthe readiness codes are not set, youwill be requested to return at a laterdate to complete the test. If you mustget the vehicle retested within thenext two or three days, you cancondition the vehicle for retesting bydoing the following.

Make sure the gas tank is nearly,but not completely full (around3/4).

Make sure the vehicle has beenparked with the engine off for 8hours or more.

Make sure the ambienttemperature is between 20° and95°F.

Without touching the acceleratorpedal, start the engine, and let itidle for 20 seconds.

Keep the vehicle in Park(automatic transmission) orNeutral (manual transmission).Increase the engine speed to 2,000rpm, and hold it there until thetemperature gauge rises to at least1/4 of the scale (about 3 minutes).

Select a nearby lightly traveledmajor highway where you canmaintain a speed of 50 to 60 mph(80 to 97 km/h) for at least 20minutes.Drive on the highway in D (A/T)

or 5th/6th (M/T). Do not use thecruise control. When traffic allows,drive for 90 seconds withoutmoving the accelerator pedal.(Vehicle speed may vary slightly;this is okay.) If you cannot do thisfor a continuous 90 secondsbecause of traffic conditions, drivefor at least 30 seconds, then repeatit two more times (for a total of 90seconds).

Then drive in city/suburbantraffic for at least 10 minutes.When traffic conditions allow, letthe vehicle coast for severalseconds without using theaccelerator pedal or the brakepedal.

If you take your vehicle for a stateemissions test shortly after thebattery has been disconnected orgone dead, it may not pass the test.This is because of certain ‘‘readinesscodes’’ that must be set in the on-board diagnostics for the emissionssystems. These codes are erasedwhen the battery is disconnected,and set again only after several daysof driving under a variety ofconditions.

If the testing facility determines thereadiness codes are still not set, seeyour dealer.

State Emissions Testing

Testing of Readiness Codes

284

０４／０８／０５　１１：２３：５５　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０２８７　

Customer Service................................Information . 286

....................Warranty Coverages . 287Reporting Safety Defects

...........................(U.S. vehicles) . 288.....................Authorized Manuals . 289

Warranty and Customer RelationsW

arrantyand

Custom

erR

elations

285

０４／０８／０５　１１：２３：５８　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０２８８　

Honda dealership personnel aretrained professionals. They shouldbe able to answer all your questions.If you encounter a problem that yourdealership does not solve to yoursatisfaction, please discuss it withthe dealership’s management. Theservice manager or general managercan help. Almost all problems aresolved in this way.

If you are dissatisfied with thedecision made by the dealership’smanagement, contact your HondaCustomer Service Office.

U.S. Owners:

Canadian Owners:

In Puerto Rico and the U.S. VirginIslands:

When you call or write, please giveus this information:

Vehicle identification number (seepage )

Name and address of the dealerwho services your vehicle

Date of purchase

Mileage on your vehicle

Your name, address, and tele-phone number

A detailed description of theproblem

Name of the dealer who sold thevehicle to you

272

Customer Service Information

286

CUSTOMER RELATIONS

RELATIONS AVEC LA CLIENTÉLE

American Honda Motor Co., Inc.Automobile Customer ServiceMail Stop 500-2N-7A1919 Torrance BoulevardTorrance, California 90501-2746

Tel: (800) 999-1009

Honda Canada Inc.715 Milner AvenueToronto, ONM1B 2K8

Tel: 1-888-9-HONDA-9Fax: Toll-free 1-877-939-0909

Toronto (416) 287-4776

Bella InternationalP.O. Box 190816San Juan, PR 00919-0816

Tel: (787) 250-4327

０４／０８／０５　１１：２４：０９　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０２８９　

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

Your new vehicle is covered by thesewarranties:

covers your new vehicle, except forthe battery, emissions controlsystems, and accessories, againstdefects in materials andworkmanship.

these twowarranties cover your vehicle’semissions control systems. Time,mileage, and coverage areconditional. Please read yourwarranty manual for exactinformation.

a seatbelt that fails to function properly iscovered for the useful life of thevehicle.

all exterior body panels arecovered for rust-through from theinside for the specified time periodwith no mileage limit.

covers all Hondareplacement parts against defects inmaterials and workmanship.

provides proratedcoverage for a replacement batterypurchased from your dealer.

providescoverage for as long as the pur-chaser of the muffler owns thevehicle.

Restrictions and exclusions apply toall these warranties. Please read the2005 Honda Warranty Informationbooklet that came with your vehiclefor precise information on warrantycoverages. Your vehicle’s originaltires are covered by theirmanufacturer. Tire warranty infor-mation is in a separate booklet.

Please refer to the 2005 WarrantyManual that came with your vehicle.

this warranty gives upto 100 percent credit toward areplacement battery.

Honda accessories are coveredunder this warranty. Time andmileage limits depend on the type ofaccessory and other factors. Pleaseread your warranty manual fordetails.

Warranty Coverages

U.S. Owners

Canadian Owners

New Vehicle Limited Warranty

Emissions Control Systems DefectsWarranty and EmissionsPerformance Warranty

Seat Belt Limited Warranty

Rust Perforation Limited Warranty

Replacement Parts LimitedWarranty

Replacement Battery LimitedWarranty

Replacement Muffler LifetimeLimited Warranty

Original Equipment Battery LimitedWarranty

Accessory Limited Warranty

Warranty

andC

ustomer

Relations

287

０４／０８／０５　１１：２４：２１　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０２９０　

If you believe that your vehicle has adefect which could cause a crash orcould cause injury or death, youshould immediately inform theNational Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration (NHTSA) in additionto notifying American Honda MotorCo., Inc.

If NHTSA receives similar com-plaints, it may open an investigation,and if it finds that a safety defectexists in a group of vehicles, it mayorder a recall and remedy campaign.However, NHTSA cannot becomeinvolved in individual problemsbetween you, your dealer, orAmerican Honda Motor Co., Inc.

To contact NHTSA, you may eithercall the Auto Safety Hotline toll-freeat 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 inWashington D.C. area) or write to:NHTSA, U.S. Department ofTransportation, Washington,D.C. 20590. You can also obtainother information about motorvehicle safety from the Hotline.

Reporting Safety Defects (U.S. Vehicles)

288

０４／０８／０５　１１：２４：２６　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０２９１　

－

＊

＊

＊

＊２００５

ＨＯＮ

Valid only for sales within the United States. Canadianowners should contact their authorized Honda dealer.The publications shown below can be purchased from Helm

Incorporated. You can order in any of three ways:Detach and mail the order form on the right half of this pageCall Helm Inc. at 1-800-782-4356Go online at

If you are interested in other years or models, contact Helm Inc.at 1-800-782-4356.

(credit card orders only)

Authorized Manuals

Purchasing Factory Authorized Manuals (U.S. only)

Authorized

Manuals

289

ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-782-4356

OR

(NOTE: For Credit Card Holder Orders Only)

MINIMUM CREDIT CARD PURCHASE $10.00

Price

Each

$70.00

$40.00

$50.00

$44.00

$34.00

$29.00

$12.00

$12.00

FREE

Publication

Form Number

61SDA06

61SDA07

61SDA06EL

61SDA30

31SDN620

31SDA720

31SDAM00

31SDNQ20

HON-R

Form Description

2003-2005 Honda Accord 2/4 Door L4

Service Manual Base Book

2003-2005 Honda Accord 2/4 Door V6

Service Manual Supplement

2003-2005 Honda Accord 2/4 Door L4/V6

Electrical Troubleshooting Manual

2003-2005 Honda Accord 2/4 Door L4/V6

Body Repair Manual

2005 Honda Accord 2 Door L4/V6

Owner’s Manual

2005 Honda Accord Service History

2005 Honda Accord 2 Door L4/V6

Quick Start Guide

Order Form for Previous Years-

Indicate Year and Model Desired

2005 Honda Accord L4/V6 Navigation Manual

PUBLICATION NUMBERVEHICLE MODEL

Name YearQty

Price

Each

Total

Price

GRAND TOTAL

HANDLING CHARGE

Mich. Purchases

Add 6% Sales Tax

TOTAL MATERIAL

$6.95

Monday-Friday 8:00 A.M. 6:00 P.M. EST

By completing this form you can order the materials desired. You canpay by check or money order, or charge to your credit card. Mail toHelm Incorporated at the address shown on the back of the order form.

Prices are subject to change withoutnotice and without incurring obligation.

Orders are mailed within 10 days. Pleaseallow adequate time for delivery.

Prices are subject to change without notice and without incurring obligation.

www. helminc. com

０４／０８／０５　１１：２４：３８　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０２９２　

－

－

－

ＳＨＩＰ

ＴＯ

ＰＡＹＭＥＮＴ

This manual covers maintenance and recommendedprocedures for repair to engine and chassis components.It is written for the journeyman mechanic, but is simpleenough for most mechanically-inclined owners to under-stand.

This manual complements the service manual byproviding in-depth troubleshooting information for eachelectrical circuit in your vehicle.

This manual describes the procedures involved in thereplacement of damaged body parts.

Authorized Manuals

Service Manual:

Electrical Troubleshooting Manual:

Body Repair Manual:

290

NOTE: Dealers and Companies please provide dealer or company name,and also the name of the person to whose attention the shipment shouldbe sent. For purchases outside U.S.A. please write to the address shownbelow for a quotation.

P.O. BOX 07280·DETROIT, MICHIGAN 48207·1-800-782-4356

Customer Name Attention

Apartment Number

State & Zip CodeCity

Daytime Telephone Number

Check or money order enclosed payable to Helm Inc U.S. funds only.Do not send cash

MasterCard

VISA Check here if your billing address is differentfrom the shipping address shown above.

Account Number Expiration: Mo. Yr.

CUSTOMER SIGNATURE DATE

Street Address No P.O. Box Number

( )

These Publications cannot be returned for credit without receiving advance authorization within 14days of delivery. On returns, a restocking fee may be applied against the original order.

０４／０８／０５　１１：２４：５２　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０２９３　

CONTINUED

BatteryCharging System

...........................Indicator . 56, 260............................Jump Starting . 256

..............................Maintenance . 244....................Specifications . 275, 277

..............................Before Driving . 159....................................Belts, Seat . 8, 17

...........................Beverage Holders . 96

..................................Booster Seats . 46Brakes

...........Anti-lock System (ABS) . 185.............Break-in, New Linings . 160

....................Bulb Replacement . 232...........................................Fluid . 225

.........................................Parking . 94..........................System Design . 184

.................System Indicator . 57, 262........................Wear Indicators . 184

.............................Braking System . 184.................Break-in, New Vehicle . 160

..Brightness Control, Instruments . 70........................Brights, Headlights . 68

Bulb Replacement..........................Back-up Lights . 232

..............................Brake Lights . 232................Front Parking Lights . 231

.................................Headlights . 228.........High-mount Brake Light . 233

....................Specifications . 275, 277....................Turn Signal Lights . 231

..............................Bulbs, Halogen . 228

....................................Accessories . 167ACCESSORY (Ignition Key

.......................................Position) . 75..............Accessory Power Sockets . 99

................Adding Engine Coolant . 217Additional Information About Your

.........................................Airbags . 20....................Additives, Engine Oil . 214

.......Adjusting the Steering Wheel . 72...........................Advanced Airbags . 24

.........Advice for Pregnant Women . 15...............................Airbag (SRS) . 9, 20

..............Air Conditioning System . 104.................................Usage . 109, 111

...............Air Pressure, Tires . 238, 239

.......................Alcohol in Gasoline . 160All Children Should Sit in a

.....................................Back Seat . 32......................................Antifreeze . 217

Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)...............................Indicator . 58, 185

...................................Operation . 185..............Anti-theft, Audio System . 149

.Anti-theft Steering Column Lock . 75

............................................Armrest . 84................................Audio System . 116

...Automatic Lighting Off Feature . 69

...Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners . 18..........Automatic Climate Control . 111

.............Automatic Speed Control . 152..............Automatic Transmission . 179

..................Capacity, Fluid . 274, 276.......Checking Fluid Level . 221, 222

.......................................Shifting . 179Shift Lever Position

...............................Indicators . 179................Shift Lever Positions . 180

....................Shift Lock Release . 182

Index

A

B

IND

EX

I

０４／０８／０５　１１：２４：５８　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０２９４　

＊＊

＊＊

...................Capacities Chart . 274, 276.............Carbon Monoxide Hazard . 49

....................Cargo, How to Carry . 169......................................Cargo Net . 172

.............................Carrying Cargo . 169..............CAUTION, Explanation of . ii

.........................................CD Care . 138....................................CD Changer .133

......CD Changer Error Messages .140.......................................CD Player . 130

.........CD Player Error Messages . 139...........................Center CD Pocket . 97........................Certification Label . 272

.................................Chains, Tires . 243....................Changing a Flat Tire . 249

Changing Oil........................................How to . 214

.............................When to . 201, 206...Charging System Indicator . 56, 260

..............Check Fuel Cap Indicator . 65

............Checklist, Before Driving . 174.....................................Child Safety . 31

..............................Booster Seats . 46.............................Child Seats . 31, 38

Important Safety.........................Reminders . 31, 36

..........................................Infants . 36..........................Larger Children . 45

.........................................LATCH . 40......................Risks with Airbags . 32

.............................Small Children . 37.........................................Tethers . 44

.........Where Should a Child Sit? . 32.......................................Child Seats . 38......................................Installing . 39

.........................................LATCH . 40......................................Selecting . 38

................Tether Anchor Points . 44Cleaning

...................................Seat Belts . 234...............Climate Control System . 111

..............................................Clock . 150...................................Clutch Fluid . 226

........................CO in the Exhaust . 281.....................................Coin Pocket . 98

............Cold Weather, Starting in . 175......................Compact Spare Tire . 248

...................Console Compartment . 97

.................Consumer Information . 286.............Controls, Instruments and . 53

Coolant........................................Adding . 217

....................................Checking . 165.........................Proper Solution . 217

...................Temperature Gauge . 65Crankcase Emissions Control

........................................System . 281................Cruise Control Indicator . 61............Cruise Control Operation . 152

....................Cruise Main Indicator . 61.....................................Cup Holders . 96

....Customer Service Information . 286

................DANGER, Explanation of . ii...................................Dashboard . 3, 54

............Daytime Running Lights . 69Daytime Running Lights

...................................Indicator . 61

.................................Dead Battery . 256............Defects, Reporting Safety . 288

................Defogger, Rear Window . 71Defrosting the

....................................Windows . 110

............................Dimensions . 274, 276

Index

D

C

II

０４／０８／０５　１１：２５：０４　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０２９５　

＊

CONTINUED

..............................Economy, Fuel . 166..................................Emergencies . 247

.............Battery, Jump Starting . 256...........Brake System Indicator . 262

................Changing a Flat Tire . 249

.....Charging System Indicator . 260..................Checking the Fuses . 264

.........Hazard Warning Flashers . 70............................Jump Starting . 256

.....Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 260...Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 261...Manually Closing Moonroof . 263

..................Overheated Engine . 258.......................................Towing . 269

...........................Emergency Brake . 94......................Emergency Flashers . 70

......................Emergency Towing . 269............Emergency Trunk Opener . 80

.......................Emissions Controls . 281.............Emissions Testing, State . 284

Engine............Adding Engine Coolant . 217

....................................Additives . 214.....Changing the Oil and Filter . 214

....Coolant Temperature Gauge . 65.........................If It Won’t Start . 254

Malfunction Indicator......................................Lamp . 261

........Oil Pressure Indicator . 56, 260.............................Oil, Synthetic . 214

..............Oil, What Kind to Use . 213

...............................Overheating . 258....................Specifications . 275, 277....................Speed Limiter . 178, 181

.......................................Starting . 175..........Engine Speed Limiter . 178, 181

......................Ethanol in Gasoline . 160.Evaporative Emissions Controls . 281

...............................Exhaust Fumes . 49Expectant Mothers, Use of Seat

........................................Belts by . 15

.........Dimming the Headlights . 68, 69Dipstick

.Automatic Transmission . 221, 222..................................Engine Oil . 164

..........................Directional Signals . 68........Disc Brake Wear Indicators . 184

.....................Disposal of Used Oil . 216Doors

..............Locking and Unlocking . 76......................Power Door Locks . 76

........DOT Tire Quality Grading . 278Downshifting, Manual

.............................Transmission . 176...........Driver and Passenger Safety . 5

...........................................Driving . 173....................................Economy . 166

..........Dual Temperature Control . 113..................Dust and Pollen Filter . 235

....................................Fan Control . 106.........................................Features . 103

....................Filling the Fuel Tank . 161Filters

.........................Dust and Pollen . 235...............................................Oil . 214

.............Flashers, Hazard Warning . 70...................Flat Tire, Changing a . 249

Fluids.Automatic Transmission . 221, 222

..........................................Brake . 225.........................................Clutch . 226

Index

E

F

IND

EX

III

０４／０８／０５　１１：２５：１０　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０２９６　

＊＊

＊＊

...............Gas Mileage, Improving . 166..........................................Gasohol . 160

.........................................Gasoline . 160

...........................................Gauge . 65.....................Low Fuel Indicator . 60

................Octane Requirement . 160........................Tank, Refueling . 161

................Gas Station Procedures . 161Gauges

...Engine Coolant Temperature . 65...............................................Fuel . 65

Gearshift Lever Positions..........Automatic Transmission . 179

..............Manual Transmission . 176........................................Glove Box . 96

Gross Axle Weight Rating.....................................(GAWR) . 191

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating.....................................(GVWR) . 191

...Identification Number, Vehicle . 272..............If the Engine Overheats . 258.............If the Engine Won’t Start . 254

Ignition..............................................Keys . 73

...........................................Switch . 75............Timing Control System . 282

........................Immobilizer System . 74

..............Manual Transmission . 223..........................Power Steering . 226

..................Windshield Washer . 220...........................Folding Rear Seat . 87..........................Four-way Flashers . 70

........................Front Airbags . 9, 20, 22..................................Front Seat . 81, 83................................Adjusting . 81, 83

.........................................Heaters . 88

.....................................Airbags . 9, 22.................................................Fuel . 160

..........Check Fuel Cap Indicator . 65......................Fill Door and Cap . 161

...........................................Gauge . 65.....................Low Fuel Indicator . 60

................Octane Requirement . 160...............................Oxygenated . 160

........................Tank, Refueling . 161...............................Fuel Economy . 166..............................Fuse Locations . 267

.....................Fuses, Checking the . 264 .............Halogen Headlight Bulbs . 228..............Hazard Warning Flashers . 70

........................................Headlights . 68........................................Aiming . 228

..............Automatic Lighting Off . 69.......Daytime Running Lights . 69

..................High Beam Indicator . 61....................Lights On Indicator . 60

............Low Beams, Turning on . 68.........................Reminder Chime . 68

........Replacing Halogen Bulbs . 228...................................Turning on . 68

..............................Head Restraints . 86.....................Heating and Cooling . 104

...........................Heated Mirrors . 94.....................................Heater, Seat . 88

.............High Altitude, Starting at . 175HomeLink Universal

................................Transceiver . 155..Hood, Opening and Closing the . 162

...........................Hydraulic Clutch . 226

Index

G

H

I

IV

０４／０８／０５　１１：２５：１９　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０２９７　

＊＊ CONTINUED

.................Jacking up the Vehicle . 251.......................................Jack, Tire . 250

................................Jump Starting . 256

..................................................Keys . 73

.......................Label, Certification . 272.................Lane Change, Signaling . 68

..................Lap/Shoulder Belts . 14, 17...........LATCH Anchorage System . 40

..Lighting Off Feature, Automatic . 69Lights

....................Bulb Replacement . 228.......................................Indicator . 55

.........................................Parking . 68..................................Turn Signal . 68

....................................Load Limits . 170......LOCK (Ignition Key Position) . 75

Locks.......Anti-theft Steering Column . 75

............................Fuel Fill Door . 161....................................Glove Box . 96

.................................Power Door . 76...........................................Trunk . 80

................Low Coolant Level . 165, 217.........................Low Fuel Indicator . 60

...Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 56, 260................................Lower Anchors . 40

.........Important Safety Precautions . 6.........................................Indicators . 55

.......ABS (Anti-lock Brake) . 58, 185Brake (Parking and Brake

............................System) . 57, 262................Charging System . 56, 260

...........................Check Fuel Cap . 65.............................Cruise Control . 61

................Door and Trunk Open . 59DRL (Daytime Running

......................................Lights) . 61...................................High Beam . 61

........Key (Immobilizer System) . 59.....................................Lights On . 60......................................Low Fuel . 60

................Low Oil Pressure . 56, 260....................Malfunction Lamp . 261

.................Passenger Airbag Off . 28..........................Security System . 60...........................Side Airbag Off . 57

...............................................SRS . 57TCS (Traction Control

.............................System) .58, 187Turn Signal and Hazard

...................................Warning . 59..........................Washer Level . 61

.........Indicators, Instrument Panel . 56...............................Infant Restraint . 36

................................Infant Seats . 36, 38

......................................Installing . 39................Tether Anchor Points . 44

...................Inflation, Proper Tire . 238........Recommended Pressures . 239

...................................Inside Mirror . 93.............................Inspection, Tire . 240

....................Installing a Child Seat . 39............................Instrument Panel . 55

........Instrument Panel Brightness . 70..............Instruments and Controls . 53

...............................Interior Lights . 100........................................Introduction . i

Index

L

J

K

IND

EX

V

０４／０８／０５　１１：２５：２８　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０２９８　

Lubricant Specifications..................................Chart . 274, 276

...........Luggage, Storing (Cargo) . 169

...........Luggage Net (Cargo Net) . 172

..................................Maintenance . 197Owner’s Maintenance

...................................Checks . 200................................Record . 203, 208

......................Required Indicator . 61..........................................Safety . 198

..............Schedule . 201-202, 206-207.Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 56, 261

...................Manual Transmission . 176.......Checking Fluid Level . 223, 224

.......................Reverse Lockout . 178.......................................Shifting . 176

Manual Transmission...................................Fluid . 223, 224

....................................Mats, Floor . 234...............................Meters, Gauges . 63

...................Methanol in Gasoline . 160..........................Mirrors, Adjusting . 93

...............Modifying Your Vehicle . 168

.........................................Moonroof . 92......................Closing Manually . 263

.....................................Operation . 92

.....................................Net, Cargo . 172...................Neutral Gear Position . 180..................New Vehicle Break-in . 160

.....................Normal Shift Speeds . 177...................NOTICE, Explanation of . i

...............Numbers, Identification . 272

..............Panel Brightness Control . 70........................Park Gear Position . 180

...........................................Parking . 183.................................Parking Brake . 94

Parking Brake and Brake System...............................Indicator . 57, 262

.................................Parking Lights . 68Parking Over Things that

....................................Burn . 183, 283Passenger Airbag Off

.......................................Indicator . 28.............................PGM-FI System . 282

..........Playing the AM/FM Radio . 116

...Octane Requirement, Gasoline . 160.........................................Odometer . 63

Odometer/Outside Temperature................................Indicator . 63, 64

.........................Odometer, Trip . 63, 64Oil

........................Change, How to . 214..............Change, When to . 201, 206..............Checking Engine . 164, 165..............Pressure Indicator . 56, 260

Selecting Proper Viscosity......................................Chart . 214

...........ON (Ignition Key Position) . 75Onboard Refueling Vapor

....................................Recovery . 281..............................Outside Mirrors . 93

.....................Outside Temperature . 64....................Overheating, Engine . 258

....Owner’s Maintenance Checks . 200..........................Oxygenated Fuel . 160

Index

P

O

NM

VI

０４／０８／０５　１１：２５：３５　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０２９９　

＊

＊

CONTINUED

....................................Pocket, Coin . 98...................................Pollen Filter . 235

..........................Power Door Locks . 76..........Power Socket Locations . 95, 99

....................Power Steering Fluid . 226..............................Power Windows . 89

.........Pregnancy, Using Seat Belts . 15........................Preparing to Drive . 174

.........Protecting Adults and Teens . 11...Additional Safety Precautions . 16

.....Advice for Pregnant Women . 15..................Protecting Children . 31, 36.......................Protecting Infants . 36

.......Protecting Larger Children . 45.........Protecting Small Children . 37

Using Child Seats with.....................................Tethers . 44

.............................Using LATCH . 40

..................................Safety Belts . 8, 17.........Safety Defects, Reporting . 288

.................................Safety Features . 7.....................................Airbags . 9, 20

.......................................Seat Belts . 8.............Safety Labels, Location of . 50

...............................Safety Messages . ii.....................................Seat Belts . 8, 17

...............Additional Information . 17Automatic Seat Belt

...............................Tensioners . 18.....................................Cleaning . 234

................Lap/Shoulder Belt . 14, 17................................Maintenance . 18

Reminder Indicator and................................Beeper . 17, 56

...................System Components . 17...............Use During Pregnancy . 15

...................Radiator Overheating . 258Radio/CD Sound

................................System . 116, 130.................Radio Theft Protection . 149

...........................Readiness Codes . 261

..Rear Lights, Bulb Replacement . 232............................Rear Seat Access . 84..........................Rear Seat, Folding . 87

............................Rear View Mirror . 93.................Rear Window Defogger . 71.........Reclining the Seat Backs . 81, 83

Recommended Shift........................................Speeds . 177

...Recommended Tire Pressures . 239........................................Refueling . 161

.......................Reminder Indicators . 55

.......................Remote Transmitter . 77Replacement Information

..............Dust and Pollen Filter . 235................Engine Oil and Filter . 214

..........................................Fuses . 264................................Light Bulbs . 228

............................Schedule . 201, 206......................Tires and Wheels . 241

.............................Wiper Blades . 236Replacing Seat Belts After a

............................................Crash . 19..........Reporting Safety Defects . 288

Reserve Tank, Engine...............................Coolant . 165, 217

...............................Restraint, Child . 31

..................Reverse Gear Position . 180...........................Reverse Lockout . 178

......................................Roof Rack . 171................................Rotation, Tire . 241

Index

S

R

IND

EX

VII

０４／０８／０５　１１：２５：４２　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０３００　

＊

＊

......Taillights, Changing Bulbs in . 232.Taking Care of the Unexpected . 247

Technical Descriptions....DOT Tire Quality Grading . 278

Wearing a Lap/Shoulder.....................................Belt . 14, 17

....................................Seat Heaters . 88.................................................Seats . 81

.........................Seats, Folding Rear . 87............................Security System . 151

.............Select/Reset Knob . 63, 64, 70.....................Selecting a Child Seat . 32

...............................Serial Number . 272...................Service Intervals . 201, 206...........................Service Manual . 289

.........Service Station Procedures . 161..........................Setting the Clock . 150

...Shift Lever Position Indicators . 179........................Shift Lock Release . 182

....................................Side Airbags . 25...How Your Side Airbags Work . 25

How the Side Airbag Off......................Indicator Works . 28......................Side Curtain Airbags . 27

How Your Side Curtain..........................Airbags Work . 27

...............................Signaling Turns . 68..................................Snow Chains . 243

.....................................Snow Tires . 242..............Socket, Accessory Power . 99

................................Sound System . 116Spare Tire

......................................Inflating . 248....................Specifications . 275, 277

............................Spark Plugs . 275, 277........................Specifications . 274, 276................................Speed Control . 152........................Speed Limiter . 178, 181

..........SRS, Additional Information . 20...Additional Safety Precautions . 30

.............................Airbag Service . 29......Airbag System Components . 20

How the Passenger Airbag Off......................Indicator Works . 28

How the Side Airbags Off......................Indicator Works . 28

..How the SRS Indicator Works . 27How Your Front Airbags

.........................................Work . 22...How Your Side Airbags Work . 25

How Your Side Curtain Airbags.........................................Work . 27

.............................SRS Indicator . 27, 57....START (Ignition Key Position) . 75

.......................Starting the Engine . 175In Cold Weather at High

..................................Altitude . 175................With a Dead Battery . 256...............State Emissions Testing .284

........Steam Coming from Engine . 258Steering Wheel

..................................Adjustment . 72.............Anti-theft Column Lock . 75

.......Steering Wheel Buttons . 148, 152...................Stereo Sound System . 116....................Storing Your Vehicle . 245

..........................................Sun Visor . 98..........................Sunglasses Holder . 99

Supplemental Restraint System......................................Servicing . 29

.........................SRS Indicator . 27, 57...................System Components . 20

..................................Synthetic Oil . 214

Index

T

VIII

０４／０８／０５　１１：２５：４８　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０３０１　

＊

＊

CONTINUED

.....Emissions Control Systems . 281.....................Oxygenated Fuels . 160

Three Way Catalytic.......................Converter . 282, 283

.........Temperature Control, Dual . 113.......................Temperature Gauge . 65

........Temperature, Inside Sensor . 115....................Temperature, Outside . 64.....................Tether Anchor Points . 44

................Theft Protection, Radio . 149Three Way Catalytic

...........................Converter . 282, 283..................Tilt the Steering Wheel . 72

..........................Time, Setting the . 150....................................Timing Belt . 227....................................Tire Chains . 243

.........Tire, How to Change a Flat . 249...........................Tire Information . 280

...............................................Tires . 238..............................Air Pressure . 239

........................................Chains . 243.........................Checking Wear . 240..........................Compact Spare . 248

......DOT Tire Quality Grading . 278......................................Inflation . 238

..................................Inspection . 240

.....................................Labeling . 280..............................Maintenance . 240

...................................Replacing . 241......................................Rotating . 241

...........................................Snow . 242....................Specifications . 275, 277

...................Tools, Tire Changing . 249Towing

.....................................A Trailer . 190................Emergency Wrecker . 269

....Equipment and Accessories . 192.............................................Tips . 194

.....................Weight Limit . 190, 191..Traction Control System (TCS) . 187

...TCS Activation Indicator . 58, 187......................TCS Indicator . 58, 187

...............TCS ON/OFF Switch . 188.............................Trailer Loading . 190

......................Trailer Towing Tips . 194Transmission

Checking Fluid Level,......................Automatic . 221, 222

Checking Fluid Level,...................................Manual . 223

..................Fluid Selection . 221, 223..............Identification Number . 273

.............Shifting the Automatic . 179..................Shifting the Manual . 176

...................................Treadwear . 278...................Treadwear Indicators . 240

.......................................Trip Meter . 64................................................Trunk . 80

..................................Cargo Net . 172....................Emergency Opener . 80

.........................................Hooks . 172.................................Opening the . 80

.............Open Monitor Indicator . 59....................................Turn Signals . 68

Unexpected, Taking Care..........................................of the . 247

..Uniform Tire Quality Grading . 278........................Unleaded Gasoline . 160

.......Used Oil, How to Dispose of . 216......................Using a Booster Seat . 46

Index

U

IND

EX

IX

０４／０８／０５　１１：２５：５６　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０３０２　

＊＊

＊

＊＊

..................................Vanity Mirror . 98.................Vehicle Capacity Load . 170

.............Vehicle Dimensions . 274, 276....Vehicle Identification Number . 272

.............................Vehicle Storage . 245.....................................Ventilation . 108

.................................................VIN . 272..................................Viscosity, Oil . 214

.............WARNING, Explanation of . ii................Warning Button, Hazard . 70

.........Warning Labels, Location of . 50....................Warranty Coverages . 287

Washer, Windshield........Checking the Fluid Level . 220

........................Level Indicator . 61.....................................Operation . 67

Wheels...............Adjusting the Steering . 72............Alignment and Balance . 240

..........................Compact Spare . 248...............................Nut Wrench . 250

...................................Replacing . 241Windows

...............................Auto Reverse . 90..................Operating the Power . 89

...........................Rear, Defogger . 71Windshield

.......................................Cleaning . 67...................................Defroster . 110

.......................................Washers . 67Wipers, Windshield

.......................Changing Blades . 236.....................................Operation . 67

....................................Worn Tires . 240.....Wrecker, Emergency Towing . 269

: U.S. only: Canada only

Index

W

V

X

０４／０８／０５　１１：２６：０１　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０３０３　

5-speed manual transmission:

6-speed manual transmission:

Service Information Summary

Gasoline:

Fuel Tank Capacity:

Recommended Engine Oil:

Automatic Transmission Fluid:

Tire Pressure (measured cold):

Spare Tire Pressure:

Manual Transmission Fluid:

Power Steering Fluid:

Brake Fluid:

17.09 US gal (64.7 )

4.4 US qt (4.2 )

30 psi (210 kPa , 2.1 kgf/cm )

32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm )4.5 US qt (4.3 )

30 psi (210 kPa , 2.1 kgf/cm )

29 psi (200 kPa , 2.0 kgf/cm )

60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )

32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm )

Unleaded gasoline, pump octanenumber of 86 or higher.

API Premium grade 5W-20detergent oil (see page ).

Oil change capacity (includingfilter):

Front:

Rear:

Honda ATF-Z1 (AutomaticTransmission Fluid) preferred, ora DEXRON III ATF as atemporary replacement (seepages and ).

Honda Manual TransmissionFluid preferred, or an SAE 10W-30or 10W-40 motor oil as atemporary replacement (see page

).Capacity:

2.0 US qt (1.9 )

2.3 US qt (2.2 )

Honda Power Steering Fluidpreferred, or another brand ofpower steering fluid as atemporary replacement. Do notuse ATF (see page ).

Honda Heavy Duty Brake FluidDOT 3 preferred, or a DOT 3 orDOT 4 brake fluid as a temporaryreplacement (see page ).

29 psi (200 kPa , 2.0 kgf/cm )

4-cylinder models

6-cylinder models

All other models

4-cylinder LX

EX-V6 with M/TFront:

Rear:

Front:

Rear:

213

221 223

224

226

225

０４／０８／０５　１１：２６：２１　３１ＳＤＰ６２０　０３０４　

2005 accord coupe online reference owner's...

Documents